2017 Nissan Sentra | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: 2017 Nissan Sentra Navigation Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 500

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2017

S E NTRA

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner’s Manual Supplement
The information contained within this supplement updates the following
information in the 2017 NISSAN Sentra, 2017 NISSAN Altima, 2018 NISSAN
Sentra and 2018 NISSAN Altima Owner’s Manual.
• “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Read carefully and keep in vehicle.
Printing: November 2017
Publication No.: SU18EA 0OCSU0

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional information about installing and using
child restraints, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in
the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on
information from the sensor, only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be
automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected
on the front passenger seat and how the
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section. One
front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-

The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.

After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

WRS0475

The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

PASSENGER AIR BAG STA)
TUS LIGHT (
ON (illuminated)

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor system,
please refer to “Normal operation” and
“Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.

Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status
light.

However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.

If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:

∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.

∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

∙ The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of this manual.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front passenger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual explains
details about maintaining and servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only)
will explain how to resolve any concerns
you may have with your vehicle, and clarify
your rights under your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you
with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details
concerning the particular accessories with which
your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
cautions and instructions concerning proper use
of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle
and/or accessory. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is
equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY
REMINDERS!

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the
port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We
do not recommend or endorse the use of
any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The
vehicle warranty may not cover damage
caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on
your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with the
most accurate information currently available.
Please carefully read and retain with this manual
all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-todate information regarding your vehicle. Current
versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner section
of
the
NISSAN
website
at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For
contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s
Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
licensed to Visteon and
Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription
after trial period and are
sold separately or as a
package. The satellite
service is available only
in the 48 contiguous
USA and DC.
SiriusXM® satellite
service is also available
in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Top tether anchors (P. 1-21)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-11)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
supplemental rollover air bag (P. 1-41)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-41)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-41)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) (P. 1-41)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
10. Rear seats (P. 1-2)
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-21)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2403

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

Engine hood (P. 3-24)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)
Windshield (P. 8-18)
Power windows (P. 2-55)
Door locks (P. 3-5)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-7)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-10)
Keys (P. 3-2)
Mirrors (P. 3-30)
Tire pressure (P. 8-33)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-33)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Daytime running lights system
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-41)
Daytime running lights system
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2427

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Trunk lid (P. 3-25)
Trunk lid release (P. 3-25)
High-mounted stop light
(if so equipped) (P. 8-28)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-40)
Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-26)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-26)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
Rearview camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2382

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-57)
Interior lights (P. 2-59)
Sun visors (P. 3-29)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)
Glove box (P. 2-49)
Cup holders (P. 2-49)
Parking brake (P. 5-23)
Front console (P. 2-49)
Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)
Cup holders (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2472

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2498

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-41)
Steering wheel switch for trip computer
(if so equipped)/vehicle information
display (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
Audio control (P. 4-34)
Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-48)
Horn (P. 2-46)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-15)
Cruise control main/set switches (if so
equipped) (P. 5-45)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(P. 4-78, 4-106)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)
Vents (P. 4-16)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-41)
Audio system (P. 4-34)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-48)
Glove box (P. 2-52)
Shift lever (P. 5-16)
Climate controls (P. 4-23, 4-31)

15.

16.
17.
18.

19.

Ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-8)
Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-10)
Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-28)
Hood release (P. 3-24)
Fuel filler door release (P. 3-26)
ECO mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-24)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
SPORT mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-24)
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-41)
Power mirror switch (P. 3-32)
Trunk release (P. 3-25)

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
MRA8DE engine

1.
2.

Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir (P. 8-11)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
4. Battery (P. 8-13)
5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-20)
6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI2931

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

MR16DDT engine

1.
2.

Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir (P. 8-11)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
4. Battery (P. 8-13)
5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-20)
6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-15)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
11. Relay box (DTRL) (if so equipped)
(P. 8-20)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3011

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light

2-16

Brake warning light

Warning
light

2-16

Name

Page

Forward Emergency
Braking (FEB) system warning light (if
so equipped)

2-17

Low fuel warning
light (if so equipped)

Page
2-20

2-20

2-17

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so
equipped)

2-18

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-20

Low tire pressure
warning light (if so
equipped)
Low windshieldwasher fluid warning
light (if so equipped)

2-19

Indicator
light

2-17

Door open warning
light (if so equipped)

2-17

Master warning light
(if so equipped)

2-19

Engine oil pressure
warning light (if so
equipped)

2-17

Power steering
warning light (if so
equipped)

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Name
Seat belt warning
light and chime

Charge warning light

Warning
light

Name

Page

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator light (CVT
models) (if so
equipped)

2-21

Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-21

Indicator
light

Name

Page

ECO mode indicator
light (if so equipped)

2-21

Engine start operation indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-21

Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-21

Front passenger air
bag status light (if
so equipped)

2-21

High beam indicator
light (blue)

2-22

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-22

Security indicator
light

2-22

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Side light and headlight indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)

2-23

Slip indicator light

2-23

SPORT mode indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-23

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights

2-23

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-23

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(for passenger’s seat and if so equipped for
driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Center armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

SEATS
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the
vehicle move. Unattended children
could become involved in serious
accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat properly. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (for passenger’s seat
and if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For
additional information about adjusting the seats,
refer to the steps outlined in this section.
LRS2642

LRS2643

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever (CVT) is in P (Park) or the manual shift lever
is in N (Neutral) with the parking brake applied.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS2644

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Move the adjusting lever as shown to adjust the
seat height until the desired position is achieved.

LRS2662

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Operating tips
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat
forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the
parking brake fully applied.

LRS2784

LRS2745

Seat lifter

Lumbar support

Move the switch as shown to adjust the height of
the seat cushion.

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable
lower back support to the driver. Push the switch
as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
LRS2194

FOLDING REAR SEAT
A to fold each seatback down.
Pull the knob 䊊

WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury or death in
an accident or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2217

CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down until in resting position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock
them in a desired adjustment position.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of
the
head
restraints/headrests. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.

● The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch to
secure them to the seat frame.
● Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
LRS2000

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.

– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
● Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest:

2. Multiple notches

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

3. Lock knob

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.

4. Stalks

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.

LRS2303

INSTALL

WRS0134

ADJUST

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
1 must be installed in the hole with the lock
䊊
2 .
knob 䊊

For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

LRS2351

LRS2305

LRS2306

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Raise

Lower

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

SSS0134

WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be in the rear
seats and in an appropriate restraint.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.

● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal injury.

● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
LRS0786

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are
equipped with a seat belt warning light. The
warning light, located on the instrument panel,
will show the status of the driver and passenger
seat belt.
NOTE:

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.

The front passenger seat belt warning light
will not light up if the seat is not occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS2642

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks
the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly
or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
LRS2674

LRS2675

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
A until
and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊
you hear and feel the latch engage.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
B as shown.
on the hips 䊊

● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
C . Be sure
retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and
retract to allow the driver and passengers some

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be
injured in an accident or sudden stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check,
get the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to
learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the
1 . The seat belt automatically retracts.
buckle 䊊

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the
1 and move the shoulder belt
adjustment button 䊊
2 , so the belt
anchor to the desired position 䊊
passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.

● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available for purchase.
The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender
is required.

● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision
or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraints
● Forward-facing child restraints
● Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. For additional information, refer to
“Child restraints” in this section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in
this section.

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. NISSAN
recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child can
pass the seat belt fit test below:
● Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
● Is the child able to sit without slouching?
● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
floor?

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted
head restraint/headrest?
● Will the child be able to stay in position for
the entire ride?

CHILD RESTRAINTS
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using
the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.
LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the
child should remain in a booster seat using a
three-point type seat belt.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, refer to
“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this
section.

WRS0256

– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
child restraint must only be used in
the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
may use either the LATCH anchors or the
seat belt to install the child restraint (not both
at the same time).
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

WRS0756

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint
unless the combined weight of the child and child
restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown.
A label is attached to the seatback to help you
locate the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS0723

Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether
strap” in this section.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
1 are located on the rear parcel
Anchor points 䊊
shelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:

For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt
is fully retracted.

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.

LRS2397

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

WRS0799

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1 over the
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
2 as shown.
point 䊊
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

LRS2627
1
䊊
2
䊊

Rear seats
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).

If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional
information
about
head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
2 as shown.
point 䊊
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1 over the
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
2 as shown.
point 䊊
WRS0475

Forward-facing — step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
should illuminate. If this
status light
light is not illuminated, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS2627

䊊
2
䊊
1

Rear seats
Top tether strap
Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1 over the
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
seatback.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.

– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster
seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision
greatly increases:

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

Booster seat installation
WARNING
LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle
seatback must be at or above the center of
the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than
the center of the child’s ears, a high back
booster seat should be used.

● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a
booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this
manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

LRS0454

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster
seat
fit.
If
the
head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information about head restraint/headrest
adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information
concerning the following systems:
● Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
WRS0475

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
may or may not illuminate,
status light
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate
on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a
rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn
and the occupant seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information
about instructions and precautions on seat belt
usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the
seat belts.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage, then inflates the air
bags as needed. Failure to properly
wear seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit. For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.

● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ARS1042

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046

WRS0431

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints”
in this section.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:

WARNING

● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.

WRS0032

WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162

SSS0159

LRS2774

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Top tether anchor
2. Rear seat belts
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
4. Head restraints/headrests
5. Front seat belts
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
7. Front crash zone sensor
8. Pressure sensors in door (front passenger
side shown; driver’s side similar)
9. Front seats
10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
11. Satellite crash zone sensor
12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

16. Satellite crash zone sensor

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag System,
please observe the following items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
● Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in the
rear seat or an object stored on the
floor.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
between the seat cushion and center
console or between the seat cushion
and the door.

13. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
14. Rear seats
15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do
not position the front passenger seat so
the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied
and the passenger air bag may deploy
in a collision. Also the front passenger
air bag status light may not illuminate.
For additional information about installing and using child restraints, refer
to “Child restraints” in this section.
● Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status light.
● If you notice that the front passenger air
bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant
classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
● Until you have confirmed with a dealer
that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly,
position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

● Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status light
may illuminate and the supplemental
air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
front passenger supplemental front-impact air
bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of collision
are similar to those of a higher severity frontal
impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the
occupant classification sensor is also monitored.
Based on information from the sensor, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the
front passenger air bag may be automatically
turned off under some conditions, depending on
the weight detected on the front passenger seat
and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status
light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section. One front air bag inflating
does not indicate improper performance of the
system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the
system. If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, you may also
contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver and
front passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to
help protect the front occupants. Because of this,
the force of the front air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or
is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
WRS0475

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small
Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

Nobody/Somebody
Adult

In addition to the above, certain objects placed
on the front passenger seat may also cause the
light to operate as described above depending
on their weight.
For additional information related to the normal
operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI)
CATOR LIGHT (
ON (illuminated)

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
that turns the front passenger air bag on or off
depending on the weight applied to the front
passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front
which is lopassenger air bag status light
cated on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
position, the front passenger air bag status light
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat
occupied status. The light operates as follows:
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
INHIBITED

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

classification sensor system, please refer to
“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle
is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an
occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,
the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can
be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however if the occupant takes his/her weight off
the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could cause
the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
properly for the most effective protection by the
seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. For additional information about proper use
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate
in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you
can monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the front passenger air bag status light may or
may not be illuminated, depending on the size of
the child and the type of child restraint being
used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not
illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN
dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with
a dealer that your air bag is working properly,
reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front
passenger air bag status light will take a few
seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who
is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the
vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light
will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and
then to OFF. This is normal system operation and
does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor
system to classify the front passenger based on
weight, please follow the precautions and steps
outlined below:
Precautions
● Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or
placed in the seatback pocket.
● Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of the
seatback.

● Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
● Make sure that the front passenger seat or
seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
● Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat
belts” section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by
the occupant classification system, and is
used as an input to determine occupancy
status. So, it is highly recommended that the
front passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the
front passenger air bag status light.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important
that you confirm that the front passenger is
properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor
may recalculate the weight of the occupant
under some conditions (both while driving
and when stopped), so front passenger
seat occupants should continue to remain
seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light
is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the
front passenger seat:
● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light
is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then
this may be due to the following conditions that
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on the
seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably
extended to the floor.

● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should
be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat
and the vehicle should be checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or
child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions
that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
wait 1 minute.
NOTE:

● Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.

● The child restraint is not properly installed,
as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of
this manual.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,
child or child restraint should be repositioned in
the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked
as soon as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
● A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
back of the front passenger seat.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger seat,
the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.

● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
● An object placed under the front passenger
seat.
● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions

WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor).

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment.
The Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for
example, during severe off-roading) may cause
the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
LRS0259

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity impact. They

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the front and rear
outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bag and will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short
time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. It is also recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the side
air bag or curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.

● It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat
belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed
to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters
allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
is
The supplemental air bag warning light
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. For additional information, refer to
⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

WRS0897

1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.
If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious
injury or death.

● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:
In the event of a crash involving an air bag
deployment (side, front or both), the vehicle’s hazard lamps (turn indicators) will
turn ON automatically.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. However, the air
bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot
be repaired.

● If there is an impact to your vehicle from
any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to
verify it is still functioning correctly. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. The OCS should
be checked even if no air bags deploy as
a result of the impact. Failure to verify
proper OCS function may result in an
improper air bag deployment resulting
in injury or death.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
● If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Information Display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-24
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-25
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (Type A)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (Type B)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
(Type C — NISMO) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Console side pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Slide front armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Overhead sunglasses storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Homelink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . 2-62
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-65
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2498

2-2 Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES
15.

16.
17.
18.

19.

* Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LIC3415

Type A (if so equipped)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Tachometer
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning and indicator lights
Fuel gauge
Speedometer

Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer
Fuel Economy
ECO mode indicator
Outside temperature display
Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and
odometer. The speedometer is located on the
right side the meter cluster. The odometer is
located within the vehicle information display
(Type A — if so equipped) or the trip computer
(Type B — if so equipped) to the left of the
speedometer.

LIC3416

Type B (if so equipped)

1.
2.

Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Outside temperature display

2-4 Instruments and controls

3.
4.
5.

Speedometer
Warning and indicator lights
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC3050

LIC2255

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3526

Type B (if so equipped)

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
2 and the twin trip odometer 䊊
1
The odometer 䊊
are displayed when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Changing the display
Press the
button on the steering wheel to
change the display as follows:
Accel guide/Average fuel economy → Instant fuel
economy/Average fuel economy → Average fuel
economy → Average speed → Distance to empty
→ Trip A → Trip B
Resetting the trip odometer
button on the steering wheel for
Press the
more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.
LPD2124

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
For vehicles without a vehicle information
A for more than
display: Push the reset button 䊊
1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warnB after the fuel
ing message in the trip computer 䊊
cap has been tightened. For additional information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
For vehicles with a vehicle information display: For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display warnings and indicators” in
the section.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC2678

Check tire pressure warning message
(if so equipped)
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off
when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE
PRES warning message is displayed each time
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting
and driving” section, and “Wheels and tires” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

LIC2414

LIC2219

Type A (if so equipped)

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
1 .
the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the reading is within the zone
A shown in the illustration.
䊊
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-7

LIC3427

LIC2445

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
the temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action
required

2-8 Instruments and controls

Type A (if so equipped)

FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

LIC2222

Type B (if so equipped)
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the fuel-filler location.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips. the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Distance to empty
● Trip computer reset

● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the modes of the trip computer can be
button on the
selected by pressing the
steering wheel. The following modes can be selected:
● Trip A

LIC3146

Trip symbol: A or B
Trip A
1 .
Measures the distance of one specific trip 䊊

Trip B
Measures the distance of a second specific trip.

● Trip B
● ECO Pedal Indicator
● Instant fuel economy
● Average fuel economy
● Average speed

Instruments and controls 2-9

NOTE:
The ECO Pedal Indicator’s bar is not displayed when the cruise control is in operation.

LIC2659

ECO Pedal Indicator Display (if so
equipped)

LIC3147

AVE & INST fuel economy

1 for improving
Use the ECO Pedal Indicator 䊊
fuel economy.

When Average & Instant fuel economy information is displayed, there will be different sections
to read:

When the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is in the green
range, it displays the recommended accelerator
pedal position to optimize fuel economy.

A
䊊
B
䊊

If the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is out of the green
range, the vehicle will not provide optimized fuel
economy.

Instant fuel economy (BAR graph)
Average fuel economy (BAR & DIGIT)

The bar graph is not displayed when vehicle
speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

Instant fuel economy
The instant fuel economy mode shows the instant
fuel economy. The display updates instantly when
driving.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Average fuel economy

NOTE:

The average fuel economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetbutton on the
ting is done by pressing the
steering wheel for more than approximately
1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a
reset, the display shows (----).

When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Trip computer reset
To reset Trip A, Trip B, AVG/mpg, or AVG/mph,
go to the desired mode on the trip computer and
button on the steering wheel for
hold the
more than 3 seconds.

Average speed
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel for more than approximately 1 second. The
display is updated every 30 seconds. The first
30 seconds after a reset, the display shows
(----).

LIC3148

Distance to empty
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel economy which will
depend on driving conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that fuel remaining volume cannot be read by
the fuel pump and should be refilled as soon as
possible.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-11

COMPASS (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates heading direction of vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
button as described in the chart below
the
to activate various features of the automatic antiglare rearview mirror.
Press and hold
the
button for about:
1 second
8 seconds
LIC3149

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The outside temperature function provides a display of the outside temperature when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The display of positive temperatures is unsigned
(blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with a
minus sign.
The outside temperature will always be visible on
the left side of the display.

11 seconds
13 seconds

Feature:
(Press button again for about 1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode

For additional information, refer to “Automatic
anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

WIC0904

COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the
button for about 1 second when
the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the
1 on or off. The discompass direction display 䊊
play will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the “CAL” or “C” icon is illuminated in the
compass display, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).

2-12 Instruments and controls

You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-13

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
button for about
1. Press and hold the
11 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
button repeatedly to toggle
3. Press the
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
button for about 13 seconds. The
the
“C” icon in the compass display will illuminate.

2-14 Instruments and controls

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Power steering warning light
(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light

Brake warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Charge warning light

Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)

Security indicator light

Door open warning light (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
(if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light
(if so equipped)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (CVT models)
(if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system
warning light (if so equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)

SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped)

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)

ECO mode indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped)

Engine start operation indicator light
(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

Master warning light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light (if so
equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-15

CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch
in the ON position without starting the engine.
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

WARNING LIGHTS
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

,
or
,
,
or
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on
briefly and then go off:

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates and
then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

or
,
,
,
,
,
SPORT ,
If any light does not come on or operate in a way
other than described, it may indicate a burnedout bulb and/or a system malfunction. It is recommended that you have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed
on the vehicle information display between the
speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally but without anti-lock assistance. For
additional information, refer to “Brake system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the ABS warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the brake system checked and, if
necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoid
high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For additional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced immediately. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning
light (if so equipped)
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.

Forward Emergency Braking
(FEB) system warning light (if
so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. It turns off after the
engine is started.
This light illuminates when the FEB system is set
to OFF on the meter display.
If the light illuminates when the FEB system is on,
it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Low fuel warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0

Instruments and controls 2-17

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0
(Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light
(if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles without
a vehicle information display) also appears
in the trip computer or the “Tire Pressure
Low – Add Air” (vehicles with a vehicle
information display) appears in the vehicle
information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the

2-18 Instruments and controls

Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
For vehicles without a vehicle information display,
the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The “CHECK TIRE
PRES” warning message is displayed each time
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For vehicles with a vehicle information display,
the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position as long as the low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section, “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of
this manual.

TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning
message”/“Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.

● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury or death.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label
located in the driver’s door opening to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
off. If the light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat or the TPMS may
bemalfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are
properly inflated, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

Master warning light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the master warning light illuminates if any of the
following are displayed on the vehicle information
display:
● No key warning
● Low washer fluid warning
● Parking brake release warning

● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.

● Door open warning

● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.

● Check tire pressure warning

● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

● Loose fuel cap warning
● Emergency brake warning
● Lock warning
● I-Key system warning
● Headlight system warning

Instruments and controls 2-19

● ITS warning
● Shipping mode warning
● Low oil pressure warning
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in this section.

Power steering
warning light (if so
equipped)
WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of the
vehicle but the steering will be harder to
operate. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

2-20 Instruments and controls

ing warning light turns off. This indicates the
power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering system is not functioning properly
and may need servicing. Have the power steering
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no
power assist for the steering but you will still have
control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.

Shift P (Park) warning light (if
so equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder chime
sounds if the shift lever is in any position other
than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFF
position. Return the shift lever to P (Park) with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the light
will turn off. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and the chime will turn off. For additional
information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing.
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services. Unless checked and repaired,
the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function
properly. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental restraint system (SRS)” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light (CVT models) (if
so equipped)

For vehicles equipped with push-button ignition
this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift lever
position. For additional information, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
models: This indicator means that the engine
will start by pushing the push-button ignition
switch with the brake pedal depressed.

Cruise main switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.

ECO mode indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ECO mode has
been selected. For additional information, refer to
“ECO mode switch” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.

Engine start operation
indicator light (if so equipped)

Manual transmission models: This indicator
means that the engine will start by pushing the
ignition switch with the clutch and the brake
pedal depressed

Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status
light (if so equipped)
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being
used.

Instruments and controls 2-21

For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler
cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is
installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle
has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the
fuel tank.
light should
After a few driving trips, the
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.

2-22 Instruments and controls

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. For additional information,
refer
to
“Readiness
for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
● MIL on steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning
appears in the vehicle information display. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
light should turn off after
vehicle. The
light does not
a few driving trips. If the
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed
to the dealer.
● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission
control system. To reduce or avoid emission
control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight
indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is
selected. For additional information, refer to
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting
that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The
road surface may be slippery.

SPORT mode indicator light (if
so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and
when the SPORT mode is selected.
For additional information, refer to “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light (if
so equipped)
This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF
switch is pushed to the OFF position. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you place the
ignition switch in the ON position. The light will
turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
operational. If the light stays on or comes on
indicator light while you are
along with the
driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
While the VDC system is operating, you might
feel a slight vibration or hear the system working
when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this
is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-23

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)
Light reminder chime

Parking brake reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the
vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking
brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to
zero.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
(if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
of the following improper operations is found.
● The ignition switch is not returned to the
LOCK position when locking the doors.
● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors.
● The Intelligent Key is taken outside the vehicle when operating the vehicle.
● Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional
information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in
the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
of this manual.

2-24 Instruments and controls

LIC2630

The vehicle information display is located to the
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
● Vehicle settings
● Trip computer information
● Drive system warnings and settings
● Cruise control system information
● NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
● Indicators and warnings

3
䊊

— select/enter the vehicle information
display menu items or to change from one
display screen to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel
economy)
buttons also control audio
The ENTER and
and control panel functions. For additional information, refer to “Steering wheel switch for audio
control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” section of this
manual.

LIC3465

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be changed
,
, ENTER and
using the
switches located on the steering wheel.
1
䊊

2
䊊

— navigate through the items in the
vehicle information display
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
— go back to the previous menu

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Meter settings” in this
section.

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display:
● Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
● Clock

STARTUP DISPLAY

● Meter Settings

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC (if
so equipped) position the screens that display in
the vehicle information include:

● Vehicle Settings
● Maintenance

● Active system status (if so equipped)

● Alarm

● Trip computer

● Unit

● Fuel economy

● Language

● Warnings

● Factory Reset

● Outside air temperature
● Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer
Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display warnings and indicators” in
this section.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user to
change the settings for the driving aids.
Menu item
Driving Aids
Blind Spot/RCTA
Emergency Brake (if so equipped)

Result
Displays available Driving Aids
Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, refer
to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the emergency brake system on or off. For addition information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Clock
Menu item
Clock

2-26 Instruments and controls

Result
When selected, the following message appears: “Set Clock in Audio” (models without navigation) or “Set Clock in NAVI”
(models with navigation). For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section of this manual (models without navigation) or the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped) (models with navigation).

Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to change the
settings for the vehicle information display.
Menu item
Main Menu Selection
Home
Average Speed
Trip A
Trip B
Fuel Economy
Navigation (if so equipped)
Audio
Driving Aids (if so equipped)
ECO Mode Settings
ECO Indicator
DISP Mode
Pedal
Inst.FE
ECO Drive Report
Display
View History
Welcome Effect
Dial Effect
Display Effect

Result
Displays the available options
Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the trip A on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the trip B on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Driver
assistance” in this section.
Displays the available options for ECO mode settings
Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display
Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed
Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display
Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy
Displays the available options for the ECO drive report
Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off
Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history
Displays the available options for the welcome effect
Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off
Allows user to turn the display effect on or off

Instruments and controls 2-27

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the
lighting and locking settings.
Menu item
Lighting
Auto Room Lamp
Light sensitivity
Locking
I-Key Door Lock

2-28 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays the available option for lighting
Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off
Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle
Displays the available locking options.
Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set
reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

Menu item
Maintenance
Oil and Filter
Tire
Other

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional
information, refer to “Changing wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual. Many factors including tire
inflation, alignment, driving habits and
road conditions affect tire wear and when
tires should be replaced. Setting the tire
replacement indicator for a certain driving
distance does not mean your tires will last
that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pressure
checks could result in tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and may lead
to a collision, which could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Result
Displays various maintenance reminder options
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one

Instruments and controls 2-29

Alarm
The alarm menu allows the user to set specific
alarms for various items on the vehicle.
Menu item
Outside Temp.
Timer Alert
Navigation (if so equipped)
Phone
Mail

Result
Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off
Allows user to set the timer alert alarm
Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off
Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off
Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to change the units
shown in the vehicle information display.
Menu item

Result

Mileage
Temperature

Displays the available mileage display units
Displays the available temperature display units

Language
The language menu allows the user to change the
languages displayed in the vehicle information
display.
Menu item
Language

2-30 Instruments and controls

Result
Displays available language options for the vehicle information display

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore
the vehicle information display settings to factory
status.
Menu item
Factory Reset

Result
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can
confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-31

LIC3675

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
2. Key ID Incorrect
3. Key Battery Low

2-32 Instruments and controls

4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
5. Shift to Park
6. Push brake and start switch to drive (if so
equipped)

7. Push clutch and start switch to drive (if so
equipped)
8. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
9. Release Parking Brake

10. Low Fuel

27. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

11. Loose Fuel Cap

28. Transmission Shift Position indicator

12. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

29. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)

Key Battery Low

30. Illumination indicator

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.

13. Low Washer Fluid
14. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

31. Outside Temperature Display

15. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

32. Low Outside Temperature

16. Door Open

33. Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) indicator
(if so equipped)

17. Alarm — Time for a break?
18. Power will turn off to save the battery

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. For additional information, refer
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

19. Power turned off to save the battery

34. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so
equipped)

20. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

No Key Detected

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, this light comes on for a period of time
and then turns off.

21. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is
left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in
the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.

The I-Key System Error message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the
light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may
be impossible to start the engine.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,
you can drive the vehicle. However in these
cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

22. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
23. BSW/RCTA System Malfunction:
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

See

24. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
25. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
26. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so
equipped)

Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent
Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot
start the engine with an unregistered key.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever
is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime
sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC or
OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Push brake and start switch to drive (if so
equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal
depressed. You can start the engine from any
position of the ignition switch.
Push clutch and start switch to drive (if so
equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in
the N (Neutral) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and
break pedal depressed. You can start the engine
from any position of the ignition switch.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system (if I-Key battery level is low)

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.

This indicator appears when the battery of the
Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key
system and the vehicle are not communicating
normally.

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the
Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

This warning appears in the message area of the
vehicle information display if low oil pressure is
detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate
low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is
not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use
the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates in the message area of
the vehicle information display when the parking
brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. For additional information, refer to

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. The warning appears each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of
all four tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with
your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the
system checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Door Open
This warning illuminates when a door has been
opened.
Alarm - Time for a break?
This indicator appears when the driver enables
the timer alert function within the driver assistance settings and the selected set time is expired. The time is based on ignition on time and
can be set up to six hours.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information
display after a period of time if the ignition switch
is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle
is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to
“Push-button ignition switch positions” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is
automatically turned to off. For additional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch positions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are
left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.
Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO
position. For additional information, refer to
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the LED headlights
are not functioning properly.
If this warning appears, have your system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and RCTA
systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the Blind Spot
Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems are not
functioning properly. For additional information,
refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This warning appears when there is radar blockage detected. For additional information, refer to
“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control system
status.
When cruise control is activated, a green circle
will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle
information display will also display the speed the
cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past
the set speed, the speed will blink until you either
cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed.
If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will

Instruments and controls 2-35

SECURITY SYSTEMS
be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will
return to if the resume button is activated.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by
the color. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage
switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to
turn off the warning. For additional information,
refer to “Fuses” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
Transmission Shift Position indicator

Illumination indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears in the
center region of the vehicle information display.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature
is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be
changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For
additional information, refer to “Settings” in this
section.
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the FEB systems are
engaged.

This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

For additional information, refer to “Forward
Emergency Braking (FEB)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is a problem
with the CVT system. If this warning comes on,
have the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

This warning appears when there is a radar obstruction detected. For additional information, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)” or
“Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

2-36 Instruments and controls

LIC0301

Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
● the power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed).
● the key — master or mechanical (Intelligent Key models).

● any request switch (Intelligent Key models).
● the key fob or Intelligent Key.
Key fob and Intelligent Key operation:
button. All doors lock.
● Press the
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn
beeps once to indicate all doors are
locked.
button is pressed with
● When the
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section in this
manual.
indicator light comes
4. Confirm that the
light stays on for about
on. The
30 seconds. The vehicle security system is
now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the
vehicle security system automatically shifts
light begins
into the armed phase. The
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
door is unlocked by the key, a request
switch, the key fob or Intelligent Key, or if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position, the system will not arm.
● If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for a period of time, unlock the
door once and lock it again.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.

Instruments and controls 2-37

● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key, a request switch, by pressing
button on the key fob or Intelligent
the
Key or placing the ignition switch in the ON
or ACC position.
The alarm is activated by:
● opening a door without using the key, a
request switch, key fob or Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by using the
inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door by pressing the
button on the key fob
or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all doors with
any request switch (Intelligent Key models) or
placing the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

2-38 Instruments and controls

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon
as possible. Please bring all registered
keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN
dealer for service.

LIC0474

Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.

WIC2748

SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-39

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately
1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
A.
can be adjusted by turning the knob 䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up 䊊
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

After a short delay the drip wipe function will
operate the wiper once more to clear remaining
windshield-washer fluid from the windshield.

2-40 Instruments and controls

LIC2324

Type A (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push
the rear window defroster switch on. The rear
window defroster indicator light on the switch
comes on. Push the switch again to turn the
defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC2650

LIC3240

Type B (if so equipped)

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting

䊊
1

2
䊊

Rotate the switch to the
position, and
the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on.

LIC3241

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

Rotate the switch to the
position, and
the headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-41

NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time
delay for autolight shutoff is adjustable for
vehicles with navigation system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle settings” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Place the headlight switch in the AUTO po1 .
sition 䊊
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
WIC1437

Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

2-42 Instruments and controls

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on,
then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, place the switch
, or
position.
in the OFF,

LIC3578

Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top side
1 of the instrument panel. The autolight
䊊
sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically turns off
the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position.
The battery saver system automatically turns off
the following lights after a period of time when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and
the doors are closed:
● Headlights, when the headlight switch is in
the

position

● Interior lights, when left in the ON position
LIC3250

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊
3
䊊

To select the high beam function, ensure the
low beams are engaged, and push the lever
forward. The high beam lights come on and
indicator light illuminates.
the blue
Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high and low beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged for this
function.

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
(Type A) (if so equipped)
The headlights automatically illuminate at 100%
intensity (low beam is used for the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system) when the engine is
started with the parking brake released. The DRL
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position. When the DRL system is active, the

clearance lights, tail lights, front side marker
lights, and rear side marker lights are off. To turn
the DRL system off, turn the switch to the
position.
When the headlight switch is placed in the
position for full illumination when driving at night
there will be no difference in the low beam intensity.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate once the parking brake is released. The
DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch
on for interior controls and switches to illuminate,
as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF
position.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
(Type B) (if so equipped)
The headlights automatically illuminate at 100%
intensity (low beam is used for the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system) when the engine is
started and the parking brake released. The DRL
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position. When the DRL system is active, the
clearance lights, tail lights, front side marker

Instruments and controls 2-43

lights, and rear side marker lights are off. To turn
the DRL system off, turn the switch to the
position.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The
DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch
on for interior controls and switches to illuminate,
as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF
position.

WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail lights
on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary
at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure
to do so could cause and accident injuring
yourself and others.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) (Type C — NISMO) (if so
equipped)
The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the
engine is started and the parking brake released.
The LED DRL operate with the headlight switch
in the OFF position. To turn off the LED DRL
system, turn the headlight switch to the
position.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED
DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch
on for interior controls and switches to illuminate,
as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF
position.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

2-44 Instruments and controls

LIC2418

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
A to increase the brightPress the “+” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.
B to decrease the brightPress the “-” button 䊊
ness of instrument panel lights.

Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, and release the lever. The turn signal
will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane
change based on road and traffic conditions.
NOTE:
If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions,
the turn signal indicator will flash at a
higher frequency when the turn signal is
activated.
LIC3252

LIC3256

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

Turn signal

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the
position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,
then turn the fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.

1
䊊

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever
until the lane change is completed.

The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

Instruments and controls 2-45

HORN

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)

LIC2419

Type A (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.

2-46 Instruments and controls

LIC1389

Type B (if so equipped)
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.

LIC3037

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious injury.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the
seat may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
LIC3344

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
indicator will come on.
switch. The

Instruments and controls 2-47

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)

POWER OUTLET

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

LIC3357

LIC3457

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in combination with a NissanConnectSM Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an
emergency.

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at
12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)
reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the
vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or
to
enroll
your
vehicle,
refer
to
www.NissanUSA.com/connect
or
call
855–426–6628.

2-48 Instruments and controls

The power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.

STORAGE
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.

LIC2426

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC2392

CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so
equipped)

● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-49

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items:
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
● Do not place heavy loads heavier than
2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest, storage pouch (if so
equipped), or in the seatback pocket.
LIC1328

SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s (if so equipped) and passenger’s
seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

2-50 Instruments and controls

LIC2704

STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)
A storage pouch may be located on the front of
the driver’s and/or passenger’s seats.

WARNING
● Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects or objects that cannot fully fit inside the pouch because they might increase the likelihood of an injury in a
crash.
To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items:
● Do not place loads heavier than 0.55 lb
(0.25 kg) on the cushion storage pouch.
● Do not place a combined weight exceeding 2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint, seatback pocket (if so
equipped) and storage pouch at the
same time.

LIC3458

Storage Tray (if so equipped)

LIC2422

STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-51

LIC3057

GLOVE BOX

WIC0257

CONSOLE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

2-52 Instruments and controls

1
To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊
2 .
and raise the lid 䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

LIC2652

SLIDE FRONT ARMREST (if so
equipped)
To adjust the front armrest, push or pull the console cover to slide it to the front or rear as desired.

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC2424

LIC2312

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s
view and to help prevent an accident.

Front cup holders

CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-53

LIC2656

Rear cup holders (if so equipped)

LIC2423

Front bottle holder

Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.

2-54 Instruments and controls

LIC2425

Rear bottle holder

WINDOWS
To open a window, push the switch and continue
to hold it down until the desired window position
is reached. To close a window, pull the switch
and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached.

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature
inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.

LIC3208

Driver’s side power window switch
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side
5. Left rear passenger side
6. Driver side automatic switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-55

LIC2309

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch and continue to hold
it down until the desired window position is
1 . To close the window, pull the switch
reached 䊊
and continue to hold it up until the desired win2 .
dow position is reached 䊊

2-56 Instruments and controls

LIC2663

LIC0410

Rear power window switch

Automatic operation

The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, push the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically closes all the way. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is
closing.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation, as it
is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

When power window switch does not
operate
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window
system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete. The
power window automatically opens or
closes depending on if the automatic down
or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other
windows.
If the power window function does not operate
properly after performing the above procedure
have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

LIC2313

POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The power
moonroof is operational for a period of time, even
if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF
position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time,
the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the
2 or close 䊊
1 position and
switch to the open 䊊
release it; it need not be held. The roof will

Instruments and controls 2-57

automatically open or close all the way. To stop
the roof, push the switch once more while it is
opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the
1 and release it; it
switch to the tilt up position 䊊
need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push
2 .
the switch to the tilt down position 䊊

Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to
1 to tilt the moonroof up.
the close position 䊊
2. Push and hold the switch to the close posi1 .
tion 䊊
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch to the open posi2 to fully tilt the moonroof down.
tion 䊊
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
performing the procedure above, have your ve-

2-58 Instruments and controls

hicle serviced. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

When tilting down

Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)

If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.

Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.

● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.

WARNING

● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
Sunshade

NOTE:

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

The step lights (if so equipped) illuminate
when the driver and passenger doors are
opened regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.

If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2302
1
䊊

2
䊊

The interior light can be turned on regardless
of door position. The light will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position when any door is
opened.
The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the
interior lights when a door is open, push the
switch; the interior lights will not illuminate,
regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s
door is closed and locked. The lights will also
go off after a period of time when the doors
are open.

Instruments and controls 2-59

LIC2303

LIC2304

SIC2063A

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

MAP LIGHTS

DOME LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To
turn them off, push the switches again.

The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

2-60 Instruments and controls

1 , the
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time
unless the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.

TRUNK LIGHT
2 , the
When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊
interior lights will stay on for a period of time
when:

● The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key,
or the power door lock switch, while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
For additional information, refer to “Exterior and
interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is activated
when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
3 , the
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-61

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most radio frequency devices
such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security
systems.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section.

2-62 Instruments and controls

WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe
exhaust gases; they contain colorless
and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon
monoxide is dangerous. It can cause
unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency.

3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
1
is
● If
the
indicator
light
䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.

LIC2365

LIC2366

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the
HomeLink®
surface,
keeping
the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button and
hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re1
lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers” in this section.

1 blinks rapidly for
● If the indicator light 䊊
2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.
A second person may make the following
steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.
Do not stand on your vehicle to perform
the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door
opener motor in the garage, locate the
“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer but it
is usually located near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there
is difficulty locating the button, reference the
garage door opener’s manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button.

Instruments and controls 2-63

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
hold the trained HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to three
times to complete the training process.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
training a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Training” procedures, replace
“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the following:

7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.

When programming a garage door opener,
etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
process to prevent possible damage to the
garage door opener components.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND
GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during training. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.

2-64 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button and the
hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to
press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds
until the frequency signal has been learned.
The HomeLink® indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds
upon successful training. DO NOT release
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”
step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it
back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is
programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and
release
the
appropriate
programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The
amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
● press and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLink® is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed
information from both buttons. Individual buttons
cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons
can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not
hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning
with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:

button that was just programmed. This procedure
will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.

FCC Notice:

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515
(except Mexico).

For USA:

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button
has now been reprogrammed. The new device
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

Instruments and controls 2-65

NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-66 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Troubleshooting guide
(automatic transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Troubleshooting guide
(manual transmission only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated
without knowing the key number.
LPD2027

Remote keyless entry key fob
(if so equipped)

1.
2.

Integrated door lock key fob
Key number plate
CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2076

1.
2.
3.

Intelligent Keys (two sets)
Mechanical key
Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

CAUTION

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent
Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of
your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components, when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that
you have to a NISSAN dealer.

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key
number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.

A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated
without knowing the key number.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of
the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this
section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the keys
which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
SPA1951

Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
driver’s door.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A mechanical key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can
be duplicated without knowing the key number.
As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys can be used with one vehicle. You
should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for
registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes
previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given
to the dealer at the time of registration will no
longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect system function.

DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of other or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death or
people and pets.

LPD0461

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral 䊊
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
4 within 5 seconds untoward the rear again 䊊
locks all doors.

SPA2726

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved to the
lock position and any door is open, all doors will
lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent
Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors
will unlock automatically and a chime will sound
after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
LPD2093

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position 䊊
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position 䊊

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition is placed in the OFF position (models
with Intelligent Key system) or when the key
is removed from the ignition switch (models
without Intelligent Key system).

LPD2570

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
2 , the
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
1 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
the door can be opened only from the outside.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● The remote keyless entry key fob transmits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry key fob while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.

As many as four key fobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional key fobs, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
● The battery is discharged.
● The distance between the vehicle and the
key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.

● Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.

● Do not drop the key fob.

The key fob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.

● Do not change or modify the key fob.

● Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that key
fob. This will prevent the key fob from
unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.
● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the
key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a
full or partial unlock, when no further user
action occurs. The relock will operate approximately 1 minute after full or partial
unlock. The auto-relock function is canceled when any door is opened or the key is
inserted into the ignition.

LPD2028

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking the doors

1. Press the UNLOCK
button on the key
fob to unlock the drivers door.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

1. Remove the ignition key.

button again
3. Press the UNLOCK
within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

2. Close all the doors.
3. Press the LOCK
fob.

LPD2029

Unlocking the doors

button on the key

● All the doors will lock.
● The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn beeps once.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the interior light
Press the
button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

LPD2030

LPD2031

Releasing the trunk lid

Using the panic alarm

Press the
button on the key fob for longer
than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button on the key fob will not operate
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time.
● Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD2032

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the key fob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote control function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a
CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel) will blink
ligent Key system warning light (
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information
about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2402

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch 䊊

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.

LPD2399

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid
without taking the Intelligent Key out of your
pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors and trunk lid by
pushing the door handle request switch within
the range of operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handle or the trunk opener
switch.
● When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
LPD2400

Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
(automatic transmission only), place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make
sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
1
3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2401

NOTE:
● Doors and trunk lid lock with the door handle
request switch while the ignition switch is
not in the LOCK position.
● Doors and trunk lid do not lock by pushing
the door handle request switch while any
door is open. However, doors lock with the
mechanical key even if any door is open.
● Doors and trunk lid do not lock with the door
handle request switch with the Intelligent
Key inside the vehicle; a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key
is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked
with another Intelligent Key.

● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

LPD2400

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1 .
2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
1
4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
again within 1 minute to unlock all doors and
the trunk lid.

LPD2401

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.
All doors and trunk lid will be locked automatically
unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request
switch.
● Opening any door or the trunk lid.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following operations.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

● Locking the doors with the remote control.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

LPD2122

Opening the trunk lid
A for
1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊
more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound
four times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● The Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.
● The doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
● The Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.

WPD0359

Locking doors

WPD0360

Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

1. Press the
Key.

2. Close all doors.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the
Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors and the trunk lid will be locked.

button on the Intelligent

button again within 1 min3. Press the
ute to unlock all doors and trunk lid.
All doors and trunk lid will be locked automatically
unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the
button:
● Opening any doors or trunk lid.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

The interior light illuminates for a period of time
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

WPD0364

Releasing the trunk lid
Press the
button for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WPD0361

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.

● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

● The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is
in range of the door handle.

WPD0362

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warning
light illuminates, be sure to check both the
vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on
in the instrument panel.
LPD2572

1
䊊
2
䊊

P (Park) position selecting warning
light
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function
that is designed to minimize improper operations
and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.
The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light
illuminates when improper operations are detected.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning when
locking the doors (if so equipped)
When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside
and outside the vehicle, check for the following:

Audible reminder and warning when
the engine stops (if so equipped)
When the P position selecting warning light
) in the instrument panel blinks in red:
(
● Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
● Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
If the chime sounds continuously when the driver’s door is opened, check the following:
● The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
● The warning chime may stop when one of
the following is performed:

● The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position.

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.

● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the vehicle.

– Closing the doors.

● The shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

Alarm and warning when the engine
starts

Preventing the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle

When the Intelligent Key system warning light
(
) blinks red and the outside buzzer sounds,
make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

If you lock all doors using the power door lock
switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of
the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will
warn you when the door is closed.

Warning for low battery power
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intelligent Key system warning light (
) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. This warning
is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent
Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new
one. For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for battery replacement.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (automatic transmission only)
Symptom
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
The P (Park) warning light in the instrument
the engine
panel illuminates and the inside chime
sounds continuously.

Possible Cause
Remedy
The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Make sure that the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.

When opening the driver’s door

A warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.

When closing the doors

The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in yellow, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The P (Park) warning light in the instrument
panel illuminates and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF
position and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or trunk.

Make sure that the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position and place the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When opening the driver’s door

A warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine

The outside chime sounds for approximately
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.
The key warning light in the instrument
The battery charge is low.
panel blinks in green.

When pressing the LOCK button on the
Intelligent Key to the lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all the doors unlock.

When closing the trunk lid

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
A door is not closed securely.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Replace the battery with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the doors securely.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(manual transmission only)

When the parking brake is fully applied

Symptom
The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.

Possible Cause
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

When opening the driver’s door

A warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ON position.

When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

When closing the doors

When pushing the ignition switch to start
the engine

The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in yellow, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside warning
chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or trunk.
3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The key warning light in the instrument
The battery charge is low.
panel blinks in green.

Remedy
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Replace the battery with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

HOOD

WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

LPD2413
1 located
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up slightly.
2 in between the hood and
2. Locate the lever 䊊
grille and push the lever sideways with your
fingertips.
3 .
3. Raise the hood 䊊

4 and insert it into
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
5 .
the slot marked by an arrow 䊊

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:
Do not place the support rod in a location
other than the designated slot.
A when removing or
Hold the coated parts 䊊
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be
hot immediately after the engine has been
stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support rod to
its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release
it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
latch.

TRUNK LID
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
LPD2119

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

LPD2558

NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer
to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this section.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.

FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.

LPD2022

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below the
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door
securely.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed. Failure
to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning apMalfunction
pears may cause the
Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malfuncproperly may cause the
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
light illuminates because
If the
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
light
to drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving trips.
light does not turn off after a
If the
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.

LPD2125

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
1
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

STEERING WHEEL

LPD2124

Type A (if so equipped)

Loose Fuel Cap warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
odometer or vehicle information display (if so
equipped) when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, do
the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2398

Type B (if so equipped)
A on the steering
button 䊊
3. Press the
wheel for about 1 second to turn off the
B after tightLOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊
ening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2123

TILT OPERATION

1 and adjust the steerPull the lock lever down 䊊
2 to the desired position.
ing wheel up or down 䊊

1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up 䊊
steering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION
1 and adjust the steerPull the lock lever down 䊊
3 to the desired
ing wheel forward or backward 䊊
position.
1 firmly to lock the
Push the lock lever up 䊊
steering wheel in place.

SUN VISORS
3 sun visor in or out as
3. Slide the extension 䊊
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.

LPD2573

VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
WPD0315

1. To block glare from the front, swing down
1 .
the sun visor 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
2 .
visor to the side 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

MIRRORS

LPD2120

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder. Do not
view information while operating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position 䊊 to reduce glare from
the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
1

Use the day position 䊊 when driving in daylight
hours.
2

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2418

WPD0126

Type A (if so equipped)

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

Type C (if so equipped)
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press and
hold the O button for 3-6 seconds. The
indicator light will turn off.
● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press and
hold the | button for 3-6 seconds. The
indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, refer to “ HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
LPD2481

Type B (if so equipped)
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
䊊
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
3 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

LPD2411

Type C (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
button as described:
the
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press and
button for 3-6 seconds. The
hold the
indicator light will turn off.
● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press and
button for 3-6 seconds. The
hold the
indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on the compass dis2 , refer to “Compass” in the “Instruments
play 䊊
and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
LPD0237

LPD2112

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Manual folding outside mirrors

The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

1 to select the right or left
Move the small switch 䊊
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
2 .
using the large switch 䊊

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the [
] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Heater (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Heater and Air Conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
iPod®* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-74
Registering with NissanConnectSM Mobile
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
NissanConnectSM Services (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Siri® Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Operating Siri® Eyes Free. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (Type B) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 4-94
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110

Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
Nissan Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . .4-116
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118
Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

LHA2898

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

6. BACK button

(brightness control) button

button**

7. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob

button

8. CAMERA button

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. NAV button*
* For additional information regarding the Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
** For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control
button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with navigation system” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN
CAUTION
● The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.

The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

WARNING
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.

● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA3748

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123/ABC
Space
Delete
OK

Result
Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key to return to the
previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page. Touch the down
arrow to scroll down the page.
Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Changes the available character set to numbers.
Inserts a space.
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.
Completes the character input.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the previous
screen.

LHA3747

HOW TO USE THE [

] BUTTON

For additional information about the “SiriusXM
Travel Link”, and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, refer
to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
For additional information about the “My Apps”
key, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in
this section.

LHA3748

To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

For additional information about the “Voice Commands” key, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item
Audio
Navigation
Traffic
System
Display
Brightness
Display Mode
Scroll Direction
Phone & Bluetooth
Clock/Date
Time Format
Date Format
Clock Mode

Set Clock Manually
Daylight Savings Time
Time Zone
Language
NissanConnect Services Settings
Sync All Information Feeds
Share Direct Information
Delete History
Unit ID Information

Result
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for
the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
Touch this key to adjust the time.
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.
Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to
set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” will set the clock to match the time zone selected from the
option below.
Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock
Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off. “Clock Mode” must be set to Time Zone for this option to be available.
Choose the applicable time zone from the list. “Clock Mode” must be set to Time Zone for this option to be available.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to change the NissanConnectSM services setting options.
Touch the yes or no key to sync all feeds.
For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Select Yes or No to delete NissanConnectSM Services history.
Touch this key to show Unit ID information

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item
Vehicle Data Transmission Setting
Camera Settings
Display Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color
Temperature Unit
Touchscreen click
System Beeps
Return to Factory Settings/Clear Memory
Software Licenses
SXM

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.

Result
For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Adjust touch-screen brightness of the RearView Monitor screen.
Adjust touch-screen contrast of the RearView Monitor screen.
Adjust touch-screen color of the RearView Monitor screen.
Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the
screen is touched.
Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message
appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information regarding SXM setup, refer to “Audio System”
in this section.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust
audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “RearView
Monitor” in this section.

button for more than
Press and hold the
2 seconds to turn the display off and show the
clock, press the button again to turn the display
back on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA3884

1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

LHA3819

LHA2944

Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor
system uses a camera located just above the
1 .
vehicle’s license plate 䊊

The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift
lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position.
Press the CAMERA button (if so equipped) while
in the R (Reverse) position to cycle through
guideline options. The radio can still be heard
while the RearView Monitor is active.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
vehicle body line 䊊

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to
operate the RearView Monitor.

Distance guide lines

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
● Red line 䊊

2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
● Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
● Green line 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances
different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you
are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to
view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA4011

LHA4012

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is further than it
appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is closer than it
appears on the monitor.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A if the object projects over the
the position 䊊
actual backing up course.

LHA2946

LHA4013

Backing up near a projecting object

Backing up behind a projecting object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in
the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.

C is shown farther than the position
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the position 䊊
C is
䊊
A.
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up
or down.
5. Press the
Auto settings.

button again to access the

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up
or down.
NOTE:

LHA3639

Models without navigation

LHA3679

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

Models with navigation
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the
setting up or down.

The procedure for adjusting the display settings
of the screen differs depending on the type of
screen present on the vehicle.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to
display the Contrast settings.

For vehicles without navigation:

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the
setting up or down.

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness settings.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to complete the adjustment.
Models with navigation:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the

button on the control panel.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.

● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
● Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road
grade.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.

● When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not
represent a system malfunction:

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment.
● There may be a delay when switching between views.
● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display
objects clearly. Clean the camera.
● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a
dry cloth.

● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

VENTS

LHA3819

LHA4299

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.

CAUTION

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
to open the vents or
the dial toward the
toward the
to close them.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

1 , the RearView Monitor may not display ob䊊

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER (manual) (if so equipped)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.

● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on and off
and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and the front and rear floor
outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the front and
rear floor outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and the front and rear floor outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
LHA4253

1.
2.
3.
4.

Fan control / system OFF dial
Air flow control buttons
Temperature control dial
Air recirculation button

5.
6.

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
Front windshield defroster button

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the

button to the ON position when:

● driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the OFF position for normal heater operation.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.

button to the OFF position
1. Press the
for normal heating.
2. Press the
3. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the winfan control dial to the
dows, turn the
highest setting and the temperature control
to the full HOT position.

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the
2. Turn the
position.

defrost/defog button.
fan control dial to the desired

fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the
2. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
defrosting or defogging. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

LHA4400

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4401

LHA4402

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

LHA4403

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on and off,
and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.

MAX
A/C

LHA2243

4.
Fan control / system OFF dial / air
Air recirculation button
5.
conditioning (A/C) button (if so
Rear window and outside mirror
equipped)
(if so equipped) defroster switch
2. Air flow control buttons
6.
Front windshield defroster button
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button (if so equipped)
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1.

— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Air recirculation button
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the

button to the ON position when:

● driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
The air recirculation function does not operate

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.

or
air flow modes.
when in the
OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.

2. Press the

Use the OFF position for normal heater or air
conditioner operation.

3. Turn the
position.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control dial to
button
the desired position and press the
to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air
button again.
conditioner, press the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

button to the OFF position
1. Press the
for normal heating.
air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

2. Press the
3. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button
2. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

● When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
mode automatithe windshield. The
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
The recirculation mode cannot be activated
position.
in the

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
position.

fan control dial to the desired

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
mode automatithe windshield. The
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control dial to
button
the desired position, and press the
to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
position.
4. Press the

fan control dial to the desired
button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to
perature is high, press the
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX
A/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
position.
4. Press the

fan control dial to the desired
button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
2. Turn the
position.

air flow control button.
fan control dial to the desired

or
are selected, the
● When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
mode audefog the windshield. The
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging performance.
● The air conditioner is always on in
mode, regardless of whether the indicator
light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips

AIR FLOW CHARTS

● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

LHA4404

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4405

LHA4406

LHA4407

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

LHA4408

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Temperature control buttons (passenger’s side)
DUAL button
A/C (air conditioner) button
fan control buttons
AUTO (automatic) button
ON-OFF button
WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

LHA2518

1.
2.
3.

Temperature control buttons (driver’s
side)
(front defroster) button
rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch

4.
5.
6.
7.

Display screen
MODE (manual air flow control) button
Fresh air intake button
Air recirculation button

● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the A/C button.
2. Use the temperature control buttons to set
the desired temperature.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature or the system may
not work properly.
● Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the

front defroster button.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be
displayed.)

2. Use the temperature control buttons to set
the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.

● Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the automatic mode.
front defroster button is
● When the
pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
set of temperature control buttons. When
the DUAL button or passenger’s side temperature control buttons are pressed, the
DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the
passenger’s side temperature control, press
the DUAL button.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the
fan control buttons to manually
control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the
front defogging
mode.

Fresh air intake
fresh air intake button to draw
Press the
outside air into the passenger compartment.

Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually control the inair recirculation button.
take air, press the
To return to the automatic control mode, press
air recirculation button or
and hold the
press and hold the
fresh air intake button
for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air
recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Air flow control

OPERATING TIPS

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.

● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.

Temperature control
Press the temperature control buttons
to set the desired temperature.

To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.

RADIO

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. For additional information, refer to “Air
conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
LHA2510

The sunload sensor (if so equipped), located on
the top passenger’s side of the instrument panel,
helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi(power ON) or ON-OFF
tion, press the
button to turn the radio on. If you listen to the
radio with the engine not running, the ignition
should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.

Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

AM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

Terms

● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA1078

Playback order chart

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
Songs do not play back in
the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

This system cannot be used to format USB
memory devices. To format a USB device, use a
personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front
seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some
USB devices may not be supported by this system.
● Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
● For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.

Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a check mark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case,
please manually reset the iPod®.
● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
● Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
equipped)
● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth®
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.

● While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.

● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

7. AUX button
8. A-Z button
9. TUNE/MENU knob/ENTER button
(back) button

10.

11. SETUP button
12. DISP (display) button
13. Station select (1–6) buttons
14.

Forward
SEEK/TRACK buttons

and

Backward

(power) button/ VOL (volume) control

15.
knob

16. CD button
17. FM•AM button
For additional information, refer to ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙ in this section.
LHA3016

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
1.

CD eject button

2. RPT (repeat) button

3. RDM (random) button
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6. USB button

Audio main operation
(power) button/ VOL (volume) control
knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) button. If
position, then press the
you listen to the radio with the engine not running,
place the ignition in the ACC position. The mode

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

(radio or CD) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
(power) button again turns
Pressing the
the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a comMenu item
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
AUX Vol.
Clock

patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Pressing the AUX button repeatedly will cycle
through available input sources:
AUX line in → USB → AUX line in
NOTE:
Sources only shown in menu if they are
connected and/or detected.

NOTE:
The DISP button only provides this information in non-radio modes.
How to use the SETUP button
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:

DISP (display) button

1. Press the SETUP button.

Pressing the DISP button displays song information, if available, such as artist, album, track name,
folder name, and source.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob until the desired
item is selected on the menu list and then
press the ENTER button.

Result
Selecting this item allows user to adjust various audio settings.
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are LOW, MID,
and HIGH.
Selecting this item allows user to adjust various clock settings.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item
Set Time

ON/OFF
Format 12h:24h
Bluetooth
Language
List of Languages
Scroll Direction
Clockwise

Result
Allows user to set time manually. To set the clock:
1. Adjust the clock hour using the TUNE/MENU knob.
2. Press the ENTER button to confirm the hour.
3. Adjust the clock minutes using the TUNE/MENU knob.
4. Press the ENTER button to finish setting the clock.
Switches clock display on or off.
Allows user to change time format between 12 hour and 24 hour.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (Type A)” in this section.
Allows user to change system language.
Available language are Spanish, Portuguese, English, and French.
Allows user to change the scrolling direction used by the TUNE/MENU knob.
Select up or down and press ENTER button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

TUNE/MENU knob/Enter button
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or right to
scroll and then press ENTER to select desired
item.
A–Z button
When listening to music via USB or iPod®,
pressing the A-Z button will launch a quick
search function in music browser that will allow
user to search for music alphabetically using the
TUNE/MENU knob.
RDM (random) and RPT (repeat) button
When listening to music via USB or iPod®,
pressing the RDM button will shuffle the songs
being played. Pressing the RPT button will repeat
the song being played.

ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
If the FM-AM button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds, the AUTOSTORE function will be
initiated. The “AST” icon will appear and “AUTOSTORE” may appear on the display screen, a
beep is heard and the radio mutes. The system
will then automatically detect the 6 stations with
the strongest frequency and save them as presets. Once AUTOSTORE is complete, the “AST”
icon will disappear and “AUTOSTORE COMPLETE” may appear on the display screen.
TUNE/MENU knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or right for
manual tuning.
SEEK tuning

(back) button
Pressing the
(back) button will return the
user to the previous menu.

FM/AM radio operation
FM-AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-

Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or
to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
Hold either button to tune continuously. Then
release button once desired frequency is
reached.
Station select (1 to 6) memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the
desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until
a beep sound is heard.
3. The station memory position (P1–P6) will
now be displayed next to the band. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
DISP button
When the DISP button is pressed while a CD is
playing, the display will change as follows:
CD:
Track Time → Album → Artist →Track Time
CD with MP3 or WMA:
Track time→ Folder title → Artist → Song title →
Track number
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button
while a
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
several times to skip
SEEK/TRACK button
backward several tracks.
while a
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
sevtrack. Press the SEEK/TRACK button
eral times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the
disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/MENU knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, press the ENTER button to view the track list
and press the button again to view the folder list.
To select a folder or track, turn the TUNE/MENU
knob to scroll through the folders/songs and
press the ENTER button to make selection.

RDM (random) button
When the RDM button (Preset station number 2)
is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the
Random mode is toggled.
CD EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.

Additional features
For additional information about the iPod® player
available with this system, refer to “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” in this section.
For additional information about the USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port interface available with this system, refer to “USB (Universal
Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without
Navigation System)” in this section.

RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button (Preset station number 1)
is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the
repeat mode is toggled.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

5. SCAN button
6.

SEEK/CAT buttons

7. iPod MENU button
8.

BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING
button
TUNE/SCROLL control knob

and

10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11. VOL (volume) knob /

(power) button

12. DISP button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*
15. FM•AM button

LHA4260

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)

2. RPT button

For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” in this section.

4. Display screen

CD eject button

3. RDM button

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

*No satellite radio reception is available when the
XM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) button
position and press the
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.

(power)
To turn the system off, press the
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.

ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options
and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to
make a selection.

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)

AUX Vol.
Brightness and Contrast
Clock
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Language

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of
the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides
no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Allows the user to set time manually.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item
to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to
the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Clock Set

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
CLOCK.

iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” in
this section.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “set
time”.

FM·AM button

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:

6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
hours.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.

8. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust minutes.

If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.

9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

XM band select

Press the
SEEK button or
TRACK
button to tune from low to high or high to low
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
station.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

10. Press the

BACK button to finish.

BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to the
previous menu screen.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.

Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
(power) button is pressed on.
the

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

SEEK tuning

SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

SEEK/CAT button

Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.

while a CD or
Press the SEEK/CAT button
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT
several times to skip backward sevbutton
eral tracks.
while a CD or
Press the SEEK/CAT button
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
several times
Press the SEEK/CAT button
to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on
a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.

The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
button is pressed twice with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.

RDM (random) button

Additional features

When the RDM button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:

For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” in this section.

CD:

For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port (models without
Navigation System)” in this section.

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio without Navigation System” in
this section.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third
parties. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.

3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5.

Backward seek button and
Forward seek button

6. BACK button
7. AUDIO button/ TUNE knob
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation
LHA2895

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.
1.

CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button while the
system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,
Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button.

AUDIO button

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.

Press the AUDIO button to show the Settings
screen on the display. Turn the TUNE knob to
navigate the options and then press the AUDIO
button to make a selection.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)

AUX Volume Level

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust. When the desired
item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not
pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BACK button

SXM band select

Pressing the BACK button will return the user to
the previous menu.

Pressing the SXM button will change the band as
follows:

SXM settings

SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)

To view the SXM settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

When the SXM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the last station played.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.

The last station played will also come on when
the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn the radio
on.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.

FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the
screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
running from low frequencies on the left to high
frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To return to
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
key.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to
the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM
mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the channel.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation
can be controlled through the touch-screen.
Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to
change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

SEEK tuning

3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.

When in FM or AM mode, press the seek
or
to tune from low to high
buttons
or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, press the seek
or
to change the category.
buttons

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899

1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be set for the
AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the
SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2, 6 for
SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button or choose the radio
band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using the SXM
button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory (1 – 6) until a beep
sound is heard.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)
or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information regarding preset
memory options, refer to “1 to 6 station memory
operations” in this section.
LHA3085

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so
equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to
designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and
SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any
of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the
current track on that station will play from the
beginning of the song.

NOTE:

LHA3087

• Smart Favorites will start functioning only
after the audio unit is turned on for a few
minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music channels only.

Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to
replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired
track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay
Screen is prompted.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

REPLAY

To replay a track from
the beginning, press
the
seek button.
The user can continue
to press the
seek button to replay
previous songs, but
can only go back as
far as the system
permits. The system
will warn the user
when they cannot skip
any further back by
displaying “At the
End” in the bottom left
corner of the screen.

SKIP

To skip a track, press
the
track button.
“Live” will appear in
the bottom left corner
of the screen indicating the difference from
play time to live audio.

PAUSE

To pause a track,
press the
pause
button.

REWIND/FAST
FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward a track, hold
the
or
seek/track button.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3

Random
Repeat

Browse

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is
being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,
album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing.
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”
alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin
playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
Press and hold the SEEK buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK buttons
while a CD or
Press the SEEK button
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK
several times to skip backward sevbutton
eral tracks.
while a CD or
Press the SEEK button
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
several times to
Press the SEEK button
skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a
CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played.
If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with
Navigation System)” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio with Navigation System” in this
section.

LHA4294

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located in the center console.
Insert the USB device into the connection port
1 .
䊊
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

SEEK/CAT or TRACK (Re-

AUX or USB button (if so equipped)

verse or Fast Forward)

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX or USB button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is playing
or another audio source is plugged in through the
AUX IN jack, the AUX or USB button toggles
between the three sources.
MEDIA button (if so equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to switch to
the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another
audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN
jack located in the center console, the MEDIA
button toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.

buttons
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/CAT or
TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an audio
file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Press
several
the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to
advance one track. Press the SEEK/CAT or
several times to skip forTRACK button
ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on
the USB device is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/MENU or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders. Turn the
knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the
knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is
only one folder of audio files on the USB device,
turning the TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL
knob in either direction will return to the first track
on the USB device.

The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4294

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

Audio file operation
AUX (auxiliary) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
press the AUX button until the center display
changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, press the POWER button
to restart the USB memory.
LHA2923

Play information
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of categories that can be used to narrow the
search. Touch the name of a song on the screen
to begin playing that song.
SEEK buttons
button while an audio file on the
Press the
USB device is playing to return to the beginning
button sevof the current track. Press the
eral times to skip backward several tracks.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Press the
button while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to advance one track.
button several times to skip forPress the
ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on
the USB device is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.

● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.

Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. To cancel Random
mode, touch the “Random” key again.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key again.

LHA4294

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB con1 .
nection port located in the center console 䊊
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to
the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the
USB connection port on the vehicle. If your
iPod® supports charging via a USB connection,
its battery will be charged while connected to the
vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® may
only be able to be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB
connection port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3
or later)
● iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
● iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0PC or later)

● iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later)
● iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware version 3.1.3 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware version 4.3.5 or later)
● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)
● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
● iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the USB, MEDIA or iPod
MENU button (if so equipped) repeatedly to
switch to the iPod® mode.
If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® plays when the audio system
is turned back on.
If the audio system is off, pressing the USB,
MEDIA or iPod MENU button (if so equipped)
turns the audio system on and plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system automatically begins playing tracks from the iPod®
when it is plugged into the port.
USB or MEDIA button
Press the USB or MEDIA button while the iPod®
is connected to show the iPod® operation menu
on the audio display. Scroll through the menu list
using the TUNE/SCROLL or TUNE/MENU knob.
Press the ENTER/SETTING or ENTER button to
select a menu item. Items in the iPod® menu
appear on the display in the following order:
● Now playing
● Playlists
● Artists
● Albums

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

● Songs
● Genres

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are repeated.

● Composers

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.

● Audiobooks

RANDOM (RDM)

● Podcasts

● Shuffle songs
For additional information about each item, refer
to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons
or
to skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
or
for 1.5 seconds while a
buttons
track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the track returns to normal
play speed.

When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it returns to the previous menu.

REPEAT (RPT)
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4294

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB con1 .
nection port located in the center console 䊊
Connect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to
the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the
USB connection port on the vehicle. If your
iPod® supports charging via a USB connection,
its battery will be charged while connected to the
vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.

● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)

Compatibility

● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)

The following models are compatible:

● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later)
● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)

● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
functional.

● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod® is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the
iPod® mode.

LHA2911

LHA2907

Audio main operation

Interface

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod® mode.

The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen,
BACK button or the TUNE knob to navigate the
menus on the screen.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pressing the ON·OFF button will
start the iPod®.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
Owner’s Manual.
● Playlists

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Artists

SEEK buttons

● Albums
● Genres
● Songs
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Podcasts

Press the SEEK button
or
backward or forward one track.

to skip

or
Press and hold the SEEK button
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse
or fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.

Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod®. When the shuffle mode is
active, the text is highlighted. To cancel shuffle
mode, touch the “Shuffle” key again until the text
is no longer highlighted.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is
active, the text is highlighted. To cancel repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key again until the text
is no longer highlighted.

LHA2279

Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch the “A-Z” key in
the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to
jump to in the list and then press the AUDIO
button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. For additional
information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers. For additional
information, refer to “FM/AM/SAT radio with
compact disc (CD) player (Type A) (if so
equipped)” in this section.

Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to toggle
through the following menu options;
● Title

NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the Cellular Phone Owner’s Manual.

LHA2775

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the
“Bluetooth” option.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Add Phone or Device”. This same screen
can be accessed to remove, replace or select a different Bluetooth® device.
4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Artist
● Album

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.

LHA3747

LHA2844

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:

information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular
phones.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

1. Press the [

] button.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

Audio main operation

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. For additional

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA2498

Type A (if so equipped)

LHA4000

Type B (if so equipped)

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL

SOURCE switch
so

Press the SOURCE switch to change the mode
in the following sequence:

The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → (XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite
radio,
if
so
equipped))→(SXM1→SXM2→SXM3 (satellite,
if so equipped))→ CD* → USB/iPod®* →
Bluetooth® Audio* (if so equipped) → AUX* →
AM.

1. Tuning switch/ENTER
equipped)

button

(if

2. SOURCE switch
3. Volume control switch

* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or
connected to the system.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.

Tuning switch
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For
most audio sources, tilting the switch up/down
for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different
function than a tilting up/down for less than
1.5 seconds.
AM and FM
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
XM/SXM (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.

iPod®

ANTENNA

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
fast forward or rewind the current track.
CD
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files) or to fast
forward or rewind the current track.
USB

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.

CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.

● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
fast forward or rewind the current track.
Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS
(if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integration technology. This allows many compatible
Smartphone applications to be displayed and easily controlled through the vehicle’s touch-screen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registration
is required to use mobile applications or to
access connected features of certain vehicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to register, visit the NissanConnectSM Mobile App website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.canada.nissanconnect.com (For Canada) and
sign up or create an account through the prompts on
the NissanConnect Mobile App. Once registered,
download the NissanConnect App from your compatible phone’s application download source and
then log into the application. If you already have an
account created through the App, please log in.

CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the
vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.

NISSANCONNECTSM SERVICES (if so
equipped)
NOTE:
For vehicles with navigation, Apple
iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnect Mobile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth®.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect App will
search your phone to determine which compatible applications are currently installed. The user
will then choose which apps they want to bring
into their vehicle from the list of apps within the
“Manage My Apps” section of the NissanConnect App on their smartphone. The vehicle will
then download the in-vehicle interface for each of
these compatible applications. Once downloaded, the user can access their selected smartphone applications through the vehicle interface.
For additional information on application availability visit www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.canada.nissanconnect.com

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnectSM Services is a suite of telematics tools that provide emergency preparedness,
remote access, customizable alerts and convenience services. This feature is an option on
Navigation equipped vehicles. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant can be
accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes Free can be
accessed in Siri Eyes Free mode to reduce user
distraction. In this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated from
TALK switch on the steering wheel.
the
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
● Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as displaying pictures or opening apps, may not
be available while driving.
● For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
● For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes
Free, please refer to the Apple website.

REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later.
Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not
supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device
compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check
phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please check
phone settings.
For best results, always update your device to the
latest software version.

LHA3918

SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing
TALK switch on the steering
wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®
to the vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estabTALK
lished, push and hold the
switch to activate the Siri Eyes Free function.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®
to the vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Initialization” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, the switch operation select screen is
displayed.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for Siri
Eyes Free activation Switch action can also
be changed from the Bluetooth® settings
menu. For additional information, refer to
“Changing Siri Eyes Free Settings (models
without navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

2. Speak your command and then listen to the
Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end of
the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the
session.
Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change to
Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when
the music starts playing. Mode selection is
determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB
cable.
If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the
track or audio source to resume playback.

2. After reading the message, push or push
TALK switch to reply
and hold the
using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or
a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes
Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without navigation
system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in the
Bluetooth settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

NOTE:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

For best results, use the native music app.
Performance of music control function
while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other
3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button.

Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and
“Show Notifications” of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a
notification for new incoming text messages.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Siri” and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using
the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press
the ENTER/SETTING button.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Free from switch on the
Models without navigation system:
steering wheel
TALK
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold the
switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch
should start Siri Eyes Free.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may
Audio Source does not
vary.
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.
mode
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, previ- For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may
ous track or play timer does vary and is controlled by the device.
not work
Cannot hear any music/
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
audio being played back
from a connected iPhone®
Cannot hear map turn-byCheck that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
turn direction guidance from
a connected iPhone®
Cannot receive text message Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”. Press the info
notifications on the vehicle
button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
audio system
Cannot reply to text mesTALK switch on the steering wheel for Siri
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
sage notifications by Siri
Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
Eyes Free

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.

WARNING
● A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatically
to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.

LHA3913

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle

● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section if the handsfree phone system seems to be malfunctioning.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Clarion.

USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Initialization

Giving voice commands

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
(Type A)
which takes a few seconds. If the
or the
(Type B) button is pressed before
the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready”
and will not react to voice commands.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.) and keep vents pointed away
from the microphone, which may prevent the
system from recognizing voice commands
correctly.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

and release the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button located on the steering wheel.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.

● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition
session. You can also press and hold
button on the steering wheel for
the
5 seconds at any time to end the Voice
Recognition session. Whenever the Voice
Recognition session is cancelled, a double
beep is played to indicate you have exited
the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “Six two zero zero”
● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special Number” command and the “Send” command during a
call).

For additional information, refer to “List of
voice commands” and “Special number” in
this section.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Number” command).
● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phonebook number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
on the steering wheel. After interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
and after the tone say, “Call Redial”.

PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and hold
the
button for 5 seconds
to quit the Voice Recognition
system at any time.
Tuning switch
While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the tuning switch
up or down to manually control
the phone system.
LHA2499

Type A (if so equipped)

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.

PHONE/SEND
(Type A) or
Press the
(Type B) button to initithe
ate a Voice Recognition session
or answer an incoming call.

LHA3916

Type B (if so equipped)

You can also use the
(Type
(type B) button to
A) or the
interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once.
For additional information, refer
to “List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section.

GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Choosing a language

NOTE:

You can interact with the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System using English, Spanish or
French.

You must press the
(Type A) or
(Type B) button within 5 seconds
the
to change the language.

To change the language, perform the following.
(Type A) or
1. Press and hold the
(Type B) button for more than
the
5 seconds.
2. The system announces: “Press the
(Type A) or
PHONE/SEND
(Type B) button for the hands-free phone
system to enter the voice adaptation mode
) button to
or press the PHONE/END (
select a different language.”
3. Press the

button.

For additional information on voice adaptation, refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode”
in this section.
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
(Type A) or
press the PHONE/SEND
the
(Type B) button. To select a different language, tilt the tuning switch (
or
) up or down.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
Voice Recognition session will end, and the
language will not be changed.

Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Main Menu
A
“Connect phone” 䊊
B
“Add phone” 䊊

Initiate from handset 䊊
C

D
Name phone 䊊

1. Press the
(Type A) or the
(Type
B) button on the steering wheel. The system
announces the available commands.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A . The system ac2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B . The system acknowl3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
edges the command and asks you to initiate
C.
connecting from the phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for
details.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular
phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
D.
phone 䊊
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
A
“Call” 䊊

B
“Phone Number” 䊊

C
Speak the digits 䊊
D
“Dial” 䊊

1. Press the
(Type A) or the
(Type
B) button on the steering wheel. A tone will
sound.
A . The system acknowledges
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
B . The system ac3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
C . If the
the area code in single digit format 䊊
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than

10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Number”. For additional information, refer to “How to say numbers” in this
section.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands.
D . The system acknowledges
6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, refer to “List of
voice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button on the
steering wheel.
button
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
button
hear the ring tone, press the
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, refer to “List of
voice commands” in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the
(Type A)
(Type B) button on the steering
or the
wheel, you can choose from the commands on
the Main Menu. The following pages describe
these commands and the commands in each
sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the Voice Recognition session. Whenever
the Voice Recognition session is cancelled, a
double beep is played to indicate you have exited
the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.

“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name) 䊊
A

“Phone Number”
B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

C
“Special Number” 䊊

D
“Redial” 䊊

E
“Call Back” 䊊

A
(Speak name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name.
For additional information, refer to “Phonebook”
in this section.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple numbers associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the correct
number.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. For additional information, refer
to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by
entering a phone number” in this section.
C
“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
D
“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System
session.
E
“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition System
session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
(Type A) or the
available. Press the
(Type B) button on the steering wheel to mute the
receiving voice and enter commands.
● “Help” — The system announces the available commands.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the Voice Recognition session and returns to the call.
● “Send” — Use the Send command to enter
numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the Voice
Recognition session and returns to the call.
Say “star” for “*”, Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the Voice Recognition session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System,
(Type A) or the
(Type
press the
B) button.
● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)

A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.

NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

B
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B.

For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
For additional information, refer to “How to say
numbers” in this section.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth® communication link.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. For additional information, refer to
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)

The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”

NOTE:

The system confirms the name, location and
number.

The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.

“Phonebook”
Say a Name

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system recognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

B
“Record Name” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the Voice Recognition
session.

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B. For additional information, refer
to “Record name” in this section.
A
“List Names” 䊊

Main Menu

B
“Delete Entry” 䊊

C
“List Names” 䊊

NOTE:

A
“List Names” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the NISSAN Voice Recognition session. For additional information, refer
to “Record name” in this section.
B
“Record Name” 䊊
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
A
“Outgoing” 䊊

D
“Call Back” 䊊

A
“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.

E
“Redial” 䊊

B
“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Redial command to dial the number of
the last outgoing call from the vehicle.

D
“Call Back” 䊊

“Connect Phone”

C
“Missed” 䊊
E
“Redial” 䊊

Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing, incoming, missed calls and to call back the
last incoming call or to redial the last outgoing
call.
A
“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
B
“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
C
“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.

NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
A
“Add Phone” 䊊

B
“Select Phone” 䊊

C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

D
“Replace Phone” 䊊
E
“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

F
“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊
G
“Display Settings” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.

B
“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete the phonebook for that phone.
D
“Replace Phone” 䊊

Use the Replace Phone command to replace an
existing phone pairing with a new phone. The
system will keep all voice tags assigned to your
phonebook.
E
“Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a
wireless connection to your phone.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

F
“Phonebook Download OFF” 䊊

Use the Phonebook Download OFF command to
turn off the automatic downloading of the handset phonebook to the available (if supported by
the cellular phone). When the command is recognized, “Sync Contacts OFF” will appear on the
audio display.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.
G
“Display Settings” 䊊

Use the Display Settings command to control
where incoming call notifications are displayed in
the vehicle. Say “Driver Only” to have call notifications shown on the vehicle information display
only. Say “Both” to have call notifications shown
on both the vehicle information display and the
center audio display.
To turn the feature back on, say “Phonebook
Download”. When the command is recognized,
“Sync Contacts ON” will appear on the audio
display.

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE
Voice Adaptation (VA) allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different Voice
Adaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park).
(Type A) or
3. Press and hold the
(Type B) button for more than
the
5 seconds.
4. The

system

announces:

“Press

the

(Type A) or the
PHONE/SEND
(Type B) button for the hands-free phone
system to enter the voice adaptation mode
) button to
or press the PHONE/END (
select a different language.”

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Press the
B) button.

(Type A) or the

(Type

For additional information on selecting a different language, refer to “Choosing a language” in this section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
(Type A) or
ready to begin, press the
the
(Type B) button.
8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases are
recorded.
10. The system will announce that voice adaptation has been completed and the system is
ready.

The VA mode will stop if:
(Type A) or the
(Type B)
● The
button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in
VA mode.
● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.
● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.

Training phrases
During the Voice Adaptation mode, the system
instructs the trainer to say the following phrases.
The system will prompt you for each phrase.
● phonebook transfer entry
● dial three oh four two nine
● delete call back number
● incoming
● transfer entry
● eight pause nine three two pause seven
● delete all entries
● call seven two four zero nine
● phonebook delete entry
● next entry
● dial star two one seven oh

● yes

● connect phone

● no

● dial seven four oh one eight

● select

● previous entry

● missed

● delete

● dial eight five six nine two

● dial nine seven two six six

● Bluetooth on

● call seven six three oh one

● outgoing

● go back

● call three one nine oh two

● call five six two eight zero

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● dial six six four three seven

● cancel
● call back number
● call star two zero nine five
● delete phone
● dial eight three zero five one
● record name
● four three pause two nine pause zero
● delete redial number
● phonebook list names
● call eight oh five four one
● correction

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. This can be especially helpful if the
noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice
recognition system to accurately interpret commands. The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user may
select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent
Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit
the manual control mode by pressing and holding
) button. At that time,
the PHONE/END (
(Type A) or
pressing the PHONE/SEND
(Type B) button will start the Hands
the
Free Phone System.

Operating tips
● To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
(
speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙ when
manual controls are initially activated.
● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
(
always speak the current menu option. Depending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
● To select the current menu option, press the
(Type A) or the
PHONE/SEND
(Type B) button.
● To go back to the previous menu, press the
) button. If the current
PHONE/END (
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
) button will exit the
PHONE/END (
Phone system.
● To exit the manual control mode, press and
) button for
hold the PHONE/END (
5 seconds.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in
this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

LHA3914

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

● For additional information, you can visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.

the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready”
and will not react to voice commands.

● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.

Operating tips

● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.

USING THE SYSTEM

● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.

The system allows hands-free operation of the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
(Type A)
which takes a few seconds. If the
or the
(Type B) button is pressed before

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
(Type A) or the
and release the
(Type B) button located on the steering wheel.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition
session. You can also press and hold
button on the steering wheel for
the
5 seconds at any time to end the Voice
Recognition session. Whenever the Voice
Recognition session is canceled, a double
beep is played to indicate you have exited
the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
on the steering wheel. After interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
and after the tone say, “Call Redial”.

LHA2499

Type A (if so equipped)

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
(Type
(Type B) button to initiate
A)
a Voice Recognition session or
answer an incoming call.

LHA3916

Type B (if so equipped)

If the operation of “Siri” is set to
“Short Press” on the Bluetooth®
setting menu, pushing and holding the
button initiates a
Voice Recognition session for the
Hands-Free Phone operation. For
additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

You can also use the
(Type
(Type B) button to interA)
rupt the system feedback and
give a command at once. For additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a
call” in this section.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system is active, press and hold
the
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
LHA2775

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item
Bluetooth
On
Off
Add Phone or Device
Replace Phone

Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the
connection process.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

Automatic Connecting Procedure

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

If no phone is connected to the system, press
button on the steering wheel. The systhe
tem will automatically begin searching for a compatible phone. If the system detects a compatible
phone a message with a PIN appears on the
screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter
the PIN and complete the connection process.

The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:

The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:

● (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted based
on the voice command provided. If the name
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another
name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number.
Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to
delete a recorded name for the phonebook
entry.

● Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.

VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
and say “Phone” to bring up the phone command
menu. The available options are:
● Call
● Phonebook
● Recent Calls
● Messaging (if so equipped)
● Select Phone

“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making a call”
in this section.

● List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.

● Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
● Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging
functions. For additional information, refer to
“Text messaging” in this section.

“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to use
from a list of those phones connected to the
vehicle.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
NOTE:
Available commands different if system is
in Manual Control mode. For additional information, refer to “Manual Control” in this
section.
1. Press the
B) button.

(Type A) or the

(Type

2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
● “(a name)” — Speak the name of a phonebook entry to place a call to that entry. The
system will respond with the name it interpreted from your command and will prompt
you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear another name from the phonebook.

● “List Names” – Speak this command to have
the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Next Entry”
or “Previous Entry” to move through the list
alphabetically. Say “Select” once desired
contact is heard and displayed on screen.
Say “Dial” to dial the number of the current
name or say “Record Name” to record a
name for the current phonebook entry to be
assigned.
● “Phone Number” — Speak this command to
place a call by inputting numbers. For 7– to
10–digit phone number, speak the numbers.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number. For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits
can be entered. Available special characters
are “start”, “pound”, “plus”, and “pause”.
When finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number or character.
● “Redial” – Speak this command to dial the
number of the last outgoing call. The system
will display “Re-dialing ”.
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the number being re-dialed will be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

● “Call Back” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last incoming call. The
system will display “Calling back
”. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available,
otherwise the number being called back will
be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, the call information is displayed on either
the vehicle information display or both the vehicle
information display and he control panel display.
(Type A) or the
Press the
button to accept the call. Press the
to reject the call.

(Type B)
button

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
(Type A) or
(Type B) button to access additional
the
options. Speak one of the following commands:
● “(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then say
“Send” or say “Correction” to change the
numbers entered.
● “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the command to mute or unmute the system.

● “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To transfer
the call back from the handset to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
(Type A) or the
(Type
press the
B) button and confirm when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting
functionality. If a call is received while another call
is already active, a message will be displayed on
(Type A) or
the screen. Press the
the
(Type B) button to hold the active call
and switch to the second call. Press the
button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button
the
will allow the same commands that are available
during any call and additional commands:
● “Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold
the second call and switch back to the original call.
● “End Other Call” – Speak this command to
stay with the second call and end the original
call.
(Type A) or the
Press the
button to accept the call. Press the
to reject the call.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

(Type B)
button

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the

button.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local regulations before using this
feature.
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
● Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
head unit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone
support MAP (Message Access Profile) for
both receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text messaging
features.
Please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility
information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

● “Call me”

Sending a text message:
(Type A) or the
1. Press the
B) button on the steering wheel.

(Type

● “On my way”
● “Running late”

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

● “Okay”

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

● “Yes”

4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:

● “No”
● “Where are you?”
● “When?”

● To (a name)

● “Custom Messages”

● Enter Number

To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

● Missed Calls
● Incoming Calls
● Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these options, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
● “Driving, can’t text”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Reading a received text message:
(Type A) or the
1. Press the
B) button on the steering wheel.

(Type

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
button to exit the
are available. Press the
(Type A) or
text message screen. Press the
(Type B) button to access the followthe
ing options for replying to the text message:
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.

● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
can also be used to create custom messages
that are sent through the phone. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

LHA2274

NOTE:

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

Apple iPhones® can only send text messages via Siri® Eyes Free.

To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

● Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
● Read Text
Speak this command to read the text message again.
● Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth”
and
then
press
the
ENTER/SETTING button:
● Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
● Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.

● Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed
list. The system will ask to confirm before
deleting the phone.
● Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed
list. When a selection is made, the system
will ask to confirm before proceeding. The
recorded phonebook for the phone being
deleted will be saved as long as the new
phone’s phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
● Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected
phone from the displayed list.
● Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic download of a connected phone’s phonebook.
● Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call
information displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming call information displayed in both the
vehicle information display and the center
display screen.

● Siri
PHONE SEND button opSelect the
eration for Siri® Eyes Free function from
“Short Press” and “Long Press” (if available).
For additional information, refer to “Siri®
Eyes Free” in this section. “Siri” is displayed
only when a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone®
is connected to the vehicle.

● Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that will be
available with the standard options when
sending a text message. To set a custom
message, send a text message to your own
phone number while the phone is connected
to the system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be set
while the vehicle is stationary.

● Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.

● Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply function. When enabled, the vehicle will automatically send a predefined text message to
the sender when a text message is received
while driving.

● New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the sound that
plays when a new text is received by a phone
connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System. The setting all the way to the
left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
● Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text
messages displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming text messages displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center
display screen. Select “None” to have no
display of incoming text messages.

● Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is sent
when the Auto Reply function is enabled.
Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three
custom messages stored in the system.
● Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the vehicle
signature is added to outgoing text messages from the vehicle. This message cannot be changed or customized.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
) button. At that
holding the PHONE/END (
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND
(Type
A) or the
(Type B) button will start the
Hands Free Phone System.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section.

LHA4298

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

● For additional information, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. If the handsfree phone system seems to be malfunctioning.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.

IC Regulatory information

● For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and
body, etc.
● The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Bosch.

5. Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed
on your Bluetooth® device, select “Pair” to
complete the pairing process.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice
Recognition System” in this section.

For additional information, refer to
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the user
to speak commands. While the system is speakbutton on the steering
ing, press the
wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will
be heard. After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
button and after the tone say, “Call
the
Redial”.

the

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the
LHA3748

button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.

NOTE:

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.

The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the [
panel.

] button on the control

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a
letter or number and then press AUDIO. The
list will move to the first entry that begins
with that number or letter.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

To reject the incoming call, either:

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control panel.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the incoming, outgoing or missed.
● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
”: Input the phone number manually
● “
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For
additional information, refer to “How to use
the touch-screen” in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.

● Press the
wheel, or

button on the steering

● Touch the phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options are
available on the screen:
● “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of the
phone call over to the handset.
● “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone.
Select again to unmute the microphone.
icon
● Phone
Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the red phone
icon on the screen or press the
button on
the steering wheel.

To accept the incoming call, either:
● Press the
wheel, or

button on the steering

● Touch the phone icon on the screen.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration requires that the phone
support MAP (Message Access Profile) for
both receiving and sending text messages.
Some phones may not support all text messaging features. For additional information,
please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility
information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:
button on the steering

1. Press the
wheel.

● “On my way”
● “Running late”
● “Okay”

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

● “Yes”

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

● “No”

4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:

● “Where are you?”

● To (a name)
● Enter Number
● Missed Calls
● Incoming Calls
● Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these options,
refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

● “When?”
● “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages are available as well
as three custom messages. To choose one
of the predefined messages, speak one of
the following after the tone:
● “Driving, can’t text”
● “Call me”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
button to exit the
are available. Press the
button to
text message screen. Press the
access the following options for replying to the
text message:
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.

● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
can also be used to create custom messages
that are sent through the phone. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2844

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Menu Item
Phone Settings
Connect New Device
Select Connected Device
Replace Connected Device
Delete Connected Device
Bluetooth

Result
For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
● Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to set
how Siri® is operated on the steering wheel.
● Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
● Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both
sources.
● Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the
vehicle from the chosen source.

● Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.
● Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications
shown in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have phone notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen.
● Text Messaging (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.
● Show Incoming Text for If so equipped):
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifications shown in the vehicle information display. Touch “Both” to have text notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.
● Auto Reply (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
● Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):
Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
● Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):
Touch this option to select a custom message to edit. There are 4 customer message
slots available.

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Voice Recognition System allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided
when the command is accepted.
● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Command not recognized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the steering wheel.
the
When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wish to activate. The command given
is picked up by the microphone and performed
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you
of the command results.

● If you want to cancel the command or go
back to the previous menu of commands,
button. The system will anpress the
nounce: “Canceling Voice Recognition” or
“Go back” depending on the current menu
level.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
button is pressed before the initializathe
tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

LHA4386

Giving voice commands
1. Press the

button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a category like phone or a command like points of
interest followed by a brand name”. A list of
available commands is then spoken by the
system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed in this
section.

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, use the volume control switches
on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the control panel.
● The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Operating tips

How to say numbers

To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the following
example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number
and then speak the phone number in any of the
following formats:

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

LHA3839

SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems:
● Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
● Navigation
● Audio

● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,
full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For
example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.

● Information
● My Apps
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say
“Phone” to access various phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would
you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and the
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a
phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to
“On”, the following voice commands are available:
● Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in which you
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

● Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After
the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the number entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the
main menu.
● List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts
for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call
the number of the phonebook entry. Say
“Send Text” to send a text message to the
number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next
Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, where the same options will then be available.
● Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”
or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such
calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on
the screen to dial that number or say “Next
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
available).
● Redial
Redials the last called number.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Read Text (if so equipped)
Reads an incoming text message. For additional information about text messaging with
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with Navigation System” in this section.
● Send Text (if so equipped)
Sends a text message. For additional information about text messaging with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
● Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual controls to continue”. Use manual controls to
change the active phone from among the
listed phones connected to the vehicle.
● Siri (if so equipped)
For additional information about the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the Navigation System:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

Street Address (address)
Points of Interest (name)
POI by Category
Home
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Enter Address in Steps
Cancel Route

For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

● Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
● Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM
frequency
● SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
● CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
● Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS

● Play Artist (name)

To access the audio system voice commands:

● Play Album (name)

1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following available commands:

Allows user to select artist to be played

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for the
information functions of the Navigation System:
● Traffic
● Fuel Prices
● Stocks
● Movie Listings
● Current Weather
● Weather Map
● 5 — day Forecast
● 6 — hour Forecast
For additional information, refer to the Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
command. For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section.

Allows user to select album name to be
played
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

● Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The following voice commands can be spoken to
have the system provide instructions and tips for
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.

The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are
listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting
with number one, until the problem is resolved.

● List Commands
● What Can I Say?
● General Help
● Quit
● Exit
Symptom/error message
The system responds “Command Not
Recognized” or the system fails to recognize the command correctly.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Manual transmission (MT) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-10
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge. . . . . . . 5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Starting the engine (models without NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
SPORT mode switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
ECO mode switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Shift lever indicator (MRA8DE engine
Manual Transmission models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-26
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . . . . . 5-29
BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-36
RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . 5-40
RCTA system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped). . . . . . 5-47
ICC system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
The ICC switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
ICC system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . . 5-62
FEB system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Turning the FEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
FEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Rise-up and build-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with
one of these open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.

CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:
● Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden
drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire
while driving).
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
of all your tires is adjusted. After the tires are
inflated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.

● The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (Type A - if so
equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low- Add
Air” (Type B - if so equipped) warning message is displayed in the odometer when the
low tire pressure warning light is illuminated
and low tire pressure is detected. The
“CHECK TIRE PRES” (Type A - if so
equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low- Add
Air” (Type B - if so equipped) warning message turns off when the low tire pressure
warning light turns off. The low tire pressure
warning light remains illuminated until the
tires are inflated to the recommended COLD
tire pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES”
(Type A - if so equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low- Add Air” (Type B - if so equipped)
warning message is displayed each time the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position
as long as the low tire pressure warning light
remains illuminated.
● The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (Type A - if so
equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low- Add
Air” (Type B - if so equipped) warning is not
displayed if the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

5-4 Starting and driving

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Do not reduce
the tire pressure after driving because the
tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check
the tire pressure for all four tires.
● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Check tire
pressure warning message” or “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (For additional information,
refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section for changing a flat
tire.)

● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted
or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some examples are:

● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate
in the following cases.

● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

● Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
● If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
● If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.

● If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and
tire without TPMS.
● If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
● If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Starting and driving 5-5

NOTE:
Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so
equipped)
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and
audible signals outside the vehicle to help you
inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift
lever into the P (Park) position (if so
equipped).

5-6 Starting and driving

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators
will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached,
the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
● If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure, push
the core of the valve stem on the tire
briefly to release pressure. When the
pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
● If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that
the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
● The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill
Tire Alert under the following conditions:
– If there is interference from an external
device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device
is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire’s pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is
low.
● If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate
due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward
and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire
pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.

road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually
slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place
off the road.

While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

2. Do not apply the brakes.

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when
tired. Never drive when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in
the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual, and also
instruct your passengers to do so.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire
rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while
driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.

Starting and driving 5-7

IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure, the vehicle will generally move or
pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this
situation, losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
To help avoid loss of control:
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information,

5-8 Starting and driving

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is
true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)
and illegal drugs, too. Don’t drive if your ability to
operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock (for models with a steering lock
mechanism). This may cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle and could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position:
1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition
switch.

WSD0041

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
● When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in
the P (Park) position.
● When removing the key from the ignition
switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the P
(Park) position.

WSD0052

The shift lever can be moved if the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT) (if so
equipped)

There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition key to the LOCK position from the ACC or
ON position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in,
then turn the key to LOCK.

Starting and driving 5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.

5-10 Starting and driving

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

LSD2014

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop the
ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal
(MT), the ignition switch position will illuminate as
follows:

The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.

Push center:

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.

● Once to change to ACC.
● Two times to change to ON.
● Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position or
N (Neutral) position (MT).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position
or N (Neutral) position (MT).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed in the meter. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
LSD2089

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and
may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,
it is possible for anyone, even someone who does
not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition
switch to start the engine.

Starting and driving 5-11

The operating range of the engine start function
1 .
is inside of the vehicle 䊊
● The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may
function.
● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin
or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position after a period
of time under the following conditions:
● All doors are closed.
● The shift lever is in P (Park).
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle
is not running, after some time under the following conditions:
● All doors are closed.
● The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of
the following occur:
● Any door is opened.
● The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.
● The ignition switch changes position.

5-12 Starting and driving

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:
● Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds, or
● Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
After Step 3 is performed, when the ignition
switch is pushed without depressing the
brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
change to ACC.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within ten seconds after the
chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:

SSD0860

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is
discharged, or environmental conditions interfere
with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine
according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

● When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ACC or ON position or the engine is started
by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key
battery discharge indicator appears in the
vehicle information display even when the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent
Key battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
● If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon
as possible. For additional information, refer
to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-13

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE (models
without NISSAN Intelligent Key®
system)

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped),
and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as
possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Lock all doors.
● Position
seat
and
restraints/headrests.

adjust

head

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. CVT model:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position or if the key
is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission model:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking
the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

5-14 Starting and driving

● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
switch and the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to START. Release
the key when the engine starts. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch to off and
wait 10 seconds before cranking again,
otherwise the starter could be damaged.

STARTING THE ENGINE (models with
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual Transmission:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition
switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.

● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.

● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

Starting and driving 5-15

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the
P (Park) position or to N (Neutral) and apply
the parking brake (MT) and push the ignition
switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.

5-16 Starting and driving

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or
damage the transmission.

CAUTION
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
● To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or
damage the transmission.
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.

CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle,
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.

LSD2568

Type A (if so equipped)

4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the
LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is
removed.

Starting and driving 5-17

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away
and result in serious personal injury or
property damage.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
any drive position, the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:
LSD2673

Type B (if so equipped)
To move the shift lever:
A while depressing the
Push the button 䊊
brake pedal
A to shift
Push the button 䊊

A
Shift without pushing button 䊊

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.

5-18 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park the
vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position to remove the key.
P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move the
shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle
is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the shift lever
button pushed in to move the shift lever
from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low) (if so equipped)

M7 (7th)

Use this position for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.

Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate,
the transmission is ready for the manual shift
mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by
moving the shift lever up or down. To cancel
manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D
(Drive) position. The transmission returns to automatic driving mode.
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) to
the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or
while driving, the transmission enters the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to
7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
M1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 6
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to
higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side. (Shifts
to lower range.)

● Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position to
return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
● When this situation occurs, the CVT
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.

Starting and driving 5-19

● CVT operation is limited to automatic drive
mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is
selected. This is not a malfunction. When
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be
selected.

To move the shift lever, complete the following
procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.
LSD2569

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift lever button pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged. For additional information, refer
to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual. Contact a NISSAN dealer
or a professional towing service.

5-20 Starting and driving

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),
have the transmission checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the
stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning
stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For
additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
This will occur even if all electrical circuits
are functioning properly. In this case, place
the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch

back to the ON position. The vehicle should
return to its normal operating condition. If
it does not return to its normal operating
condition, have the transmission checked
and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially careful
when driving. If necessary, pull to the side
of the road at a safe place and allow the
transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)

● Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.

CAUTION
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
● Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
● Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.

WARNING
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.

Starting and driving 5-21

1 and
To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring 䊊
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
1 returns to its original posiThe shift lever ring 䊊
tion when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds
SSD0552

Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If
the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the
transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be
heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according
to vehicle speed.

5-22 Starting and driving

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR Change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

mph (km/h)
8(13)
17 (27)
25 (40)
36 (58)
51 (82)

MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR Change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

mph (km/h)
13 (21)
22 (35)
30 (48)
35 (56)
42 (68)

Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

PARKING BRAKE
MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

mph (km/h)
30 (48)
52 (84)
73 (117)
94 (152)
—
—

MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

mph (km/h)
29 (46)
47 (75)
68 (108)
90 (145)
—
—

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.

LSD2197
A.
To engage: Pull the lever up 䊊

To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
CVT models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-23

SPORT MODE SWITCH (if so
equipped)

ECO MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button and lower comB.
pletely 䊊
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

LIC2417

LIC2416

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the throttle
sensitivity and transmission points to enhance
performance. Push the SPORT switch on the
instrument panel to activate. The SPORT mode
indicator light (on the speedometer) will illuminate. The SPORT mode indicator light will remain
lit while the mode is active.

The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and
transmission points.

NOTE:

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on
the meter or vehicle information display) will turn
off.

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
reduced.

5-24 Starting and driving

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the
meter or vehicle information display) will remain lit
while the mode is active.

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the
accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO
mode switch is pushed to OFF. Release the
accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.

NOTE:
● The shift indicator is a guide for fuel
economy. Always pay attention to road conditions and other traffic.

The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a
malfunction occurs in the system.

● Downshift indicator icon to the “1” (1st) position is not displayed.

Turn off the ECO mode, or depress the accelerator pedal fully when:

● If the downshifting icon is displayed when
decreasing your vehicle speed, it indicates
that the engine speed is low compared to
the gear position.

● Driving with a heavy load of passengers or
cargo in the vehicle
● Driving on a steep uphill slope
● ECO mode may affect air conditioner performance
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving
factors influence its effectiveness.

LSD2143

SHIFT LEVER INDICATOR (MRA8DE
engine Manual Transmission models
only)
The shift lever indicator is used to support the
suitable timing of gear change. It operates only
when the ECO mode is in the “ON” state.
The shift indicator icon and recommended gear
position are displayed.
The shift indicator icon indicates when to upshift
or downshift for fuel economy.

Starting and driving 5-25

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes,
always use the side and rear mirrors
and turn and look in the direction your
vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to
change lanes. Never rely solely on the
BSW system.
LSD2692

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other
vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

5-26 Starting and driving

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
1

SSD1030

Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either
side of your vehicle within the detection zone
shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts
from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear
bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately
20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)
illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the
system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA
indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light
continues to flash until the detected vehicles
leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates
for a few seconds when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light is adjusted automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after
the driver activates the turn signal, then only the
side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no
chime sounds. For additional information, refer to
“BSW driving situations” in this section.

LSD2624

Starting and driving 5-27

LSD2622

Type A (if so equipped)

5-28 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the BSW system.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display. Use
button to select “Driver Assisthe
tance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER
button.
3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the
ENTER button.
NOTE:
● When enabling/disabling the system, the
system will retain current settings even if the
engine is restarted.
● The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a
separate selection in the vehicle information
display for the RCTA system. When the
BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also
disabled.

LSD2621

● When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.

Type B (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-29

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the BSW system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
● The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection
zone when you accelerate from a
stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.

5-30 Starting and driving

– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are
traveling close together.
● The radar sensors’ detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane, the
radar sensors may not detect vehicles in
an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect
vehicles driving two lanes away.
● The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however
objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
● The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow
vehicle

build-up

the

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle
● Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors. These conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles.
● Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound, and
it may not be heard.

Another vehicle approaching from
behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2299

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Indicator
on

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn
signal when another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.

Indicator
off

NOTE:

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator
flashing

● The radar sensors may not detect vehicles
which are approaching rapidly from behind.
● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-31

● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle
stays in the detection zone for approximately
2 seconds.

LSD2303

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
● When overtaking several vehicles in a row,
the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be
detected if they are traveling close together.
● The radar sensors may not detect slower
moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-32 Starting and driving

● The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle
which is traveling at about the same speed
as your vehicle when it enters the detection
zone.

LSD2305

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from
either side.

LSD2308

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn
signal while another vehicle is in the detection
zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the
side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
● If the driver activates the turn signal before a
vehicle enters the detection zone, the side
indicator light will flash but no chime will
sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-33

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will
be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear and
A in
the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink 䊊
the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no
longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing
the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
system will resume automatically.

LSD2623

5-34 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.

Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off
automatically. The system malfunction warning
message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange)
will appear in the vehicle information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Radio frequency statement

Action to take:

FCC : OAYSRR2B

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For USA

LSD2692

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar sensors
clean.

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.

FCC Warning

The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the
area around the radar sensors.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310

Starting and driving 5-35

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not
designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a
parking space, always use the side and
rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction your vehicle will move. Never
rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing
out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in
reverse, the system is designed to detect other
vehicles approaching from the right or left of the
vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will
alert you.

5-36 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an
approaching vehicle when the driver is backing
out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the
vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from
either side, the system chimes (once) and the
side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the
side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2624

Starting and driving 5-37

LSD2216

LSD2692
1 inThe RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊
stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to
detect an approaching vehicle.
1 can detect an approaching
The radar sensors 䊊
vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
away.

5-38 Starting and driving

LSD2622

Type A (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-39

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable
the RCTA system.
button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display. Use
button to select “Driver Assisthe
tance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER
button.
3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the
ENTER button.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
NOTE:
● The RCTA system is integrated into the
BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the
RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled,
the RCTA system is also disabled.
● When enabling/disabling the system, the
system setting will be retained even if the
engine is restarted.
LSD2621

Type B (if so equipped)

5-40 Starting and driving

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the RCTA system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● Always check surroundings and turn to
check what is behind you before backing
up. The radar sensors detect approaching
(moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
LSD2173

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

● The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked
next to you obstructs the beam of the
radar sensor.
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.

Starting and driving 5-41

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration d: When an approaching
vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle formed
by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small
● The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the
vehicle
– Dirt build- up on the vehicle
● Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or
apply additional paint near the radar
sensors. These conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles
● Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may
not be heard.

5-42 Starting and driving

LSD2043

Illustration 1
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching
in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite
direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not
be sounded by the RCTA system after the
first vehicle passes the sensors.

LSD2044

Illustration 2

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will
be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear and
A in
the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink 䊊
the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions
no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
system will resume automatically.

LSD2623

Starting and driving 5-43

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional
paint near the radar sensors.

Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

Do not strike or damage the area around the
radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

NOTE:

Radio frequency statement

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA
system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
LSD2692

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 for the BSW and
The two radar sensors 䊊
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.
Always keep the area near the radar sensors
clean.

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.

FCC Warning

The blocked condition may also be caused by
objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the
area around the radar sensors.

5-44 Starting and driving

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

LSD2430

Type A (if so equipped)

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch

LSD2572

Type B (if so equipped)
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
or
panel then blinks to warn the driver. For
additional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” or “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
● If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, push the
cruise control ON/OFF switch off and have
the system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-45

● The CRUISE indicator light may blink when
the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed
ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the
following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
● Push the CANCEL switch, or
● Tap the brake pedal, or
● Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
or
panel goes out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

● You depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.

To turn on the cruise control, push the
indicator
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE or
light in the instrument panel comes on.

● The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph
(13 km/h) below the set speed.

5-46 Starting and driving

● You depress the clutch pedal (MT), or move
the shift lever to N (Neutral) (CVT).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning
or avoidance device. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
● Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
● Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To
avoid serious injury or death, do not rely
on the system to prevent accidents or to
control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC
system except in appropriate road and
traffic conditions.

LSD2698

The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle
traveling in the same lane and direction.
A located
The ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊
on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles
traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle
speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in
front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

Starting and driving 5-47

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION
The ICC system maintains a selected distance
from the vehicle in front of you within the speed
range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set
speed. The set speed can be selected by the
driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h),
based on road conditions.
The vehicle travels at the set speed when the
road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you
and can reduce the speed to match a slower
vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the
vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead
comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a
standstill. However, the ICC system can only
apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking
power.

LSD2564

5-48 Starting and driving

This system should only be used when traffic
conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly
constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane
ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system cannot
decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime
and blink the system display to notify the driver to
take necessary action.

For additional information, refer to “Approach
warning” in this section.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the
speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when
acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle
cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC
system.

The following items are controlled in the ICC
system:
● When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,
the ICC system maintains the speed set by
the driver. The set speed range is between
approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and
144 km/h).
● When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the
ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain
the distance, selected by the driver, from the
vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to
a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill
with a warning chime.
● When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved
out from its lane of travel, the ICC system
accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up
to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed
or warn you when you approach stationary and
slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to
vehicle operation to maintain proper distance
from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates
or traffic congestion.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and
approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the
ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the
distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits
the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and
maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set
speed.

Starting and driving 5-49

3. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed
incrementally.
4. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
● Long
● Middle
● Short
5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
LSD2505

LSD2565

THE ICC SWITCH

The ICC system display and indicators

The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.

The display is located between the speedometer
and tachometer.

1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the
set speed.
2. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

5-50 Starting and driving

1. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
2. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
● ICC system ON indicator (white): Indicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
is ON.

● ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is set.
● ICC system warning (orange): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in the
ICC system.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.
4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front
of you.
LSD2576

LSD2577

To turn on the cruise control: quickly push
A . The
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊
ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance
indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come
on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed: accelerate your vehicle
to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
switch and release it. The ICC system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set
distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicaB will come on. Take your foot off the acceltor 䊊
erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.

Operating ICC

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under
the following conditions, the system cannot be
set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
● When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected

Starting and driving 5-51

● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or
L (Low) (if so equipped) mode

NOTE:
● The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.

● When the parking brake is applied
● When the brakes are operated by the driver

● When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under
the following conditions, the system cannot be
set.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC
system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

A warning chime will sound and a message will
pop up:
● When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC
system, turn on the VDC system. Push the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC
system and reset the ICC switch by pushing
the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
For additional information about the VDC
system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in this section.
● When ABS or VDC is operating
● When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no longer
slipping. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
to turn off the ICC system, and reset the ICC
system by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch again.)

5-52 Starting and driving

Vehicle ahead not detected
LSD2566
1
䊊
2
䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead

Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the
ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match
the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system
then controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver
selected distance.

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the
ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to
resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC
system then maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle
ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to
the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system
is in operation, the system controls the distance
to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will
be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one
of the following methods:
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The
set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada).
● Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h
for Canada).
LSD2575

When passing another vehicle, the set speed
B will flash when the vehicle speed
indicator 䊊
exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the
vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC
system, you can depress the accelerator pedal
when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle
rapidly.

LSD2566
1
䊊
2
䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead

How to change the set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed: use one of the
following methods:
● Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
● Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed
indicator will go out.

To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one
of the following methods:
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The
set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada).
● Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by approximately 1 mph
(1 km/h for Canada).

● Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
ICC indicators will go out.

Starting and driving 5-53

To resume the preset speed: push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will
resume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD2510

LSD2636

How to change the set distance to the
vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
A is pushed, the
Each time the distance switch 䊊
set distance will change to long, middle, short
and back to long again, in that sequence.

Distance

Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

Long

200 (60)

Middle

150 (45)

Short

90 (30)

● The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed. The
higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
● If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine is
started, the initial setting becomes “long.”)

5-54 Starting and driving

Approach warning

NOTE:

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead
due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if
another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the
driver with the chime and ICC system display.
Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to
maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when the
ICC sensor detects objects on the side of
the vehicle or on the side of the road. This
may cause the ICC system to decelerate or
accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may
detect these objects when the vehicle is
driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly
roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.
In these cases you will have to manually
control the proper distance ahead of your
vehicle.

● The chime sounds.
● The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases
when there is a short distance between vehicles.
Some examples are:
● When the vehicles are traveling at the same
speed and the distance between vehicles is
not changing.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving
position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition
(for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some
damage).

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster
and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
● When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
● The vehicle approaches other vehicles that
are parked or moving slowly.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

Starting and driving 5-55

● As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive or
absentminded driving, or overcome
poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed
by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead
and the surrounding circumstances in
order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
SSD0252

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the ICC system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
● The ICC system is primarily intended for
use on straight, dry, open roads with
light traffic. It is not advisable to use the
ICC system in city traffic or congested
areas.

5-56 Starting and driving

● The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system
should be used in evenly flowing traffic.
Do not use the system on roads with
sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy
rain or in fog.

● If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system. The
system will cancel once it judges that
the vehicle has come to a standstill and
sound a warning chime. To prevent the
vehicle from moving, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
● Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually
control the proper following distance.
The ICC system may not be able to
maintain the selected distance between
vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some
circumstances.

● The system may not detect the vehicle
in front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never
use the ICC system under the following
conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
bumper around the distance sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads
– When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar sources.

● Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.

The ICC system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s operation within the limitations of the system.

● In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this
warning section.

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A
vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode
to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle
ahead.

The radar sensor will not detect the following
objects:
● Stationary and slow moving vehicles
● Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
● Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
● Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The following are some conditions in which the
sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead
and the system may not operate properly:

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane
of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the
same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from
the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may have to
manually control the proper distance away
from vehicle traveling ahead.

● When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
● When excessively heavy baggage is loaded
in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-57

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as winding,
hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are
under construction, the ICC sensor may detect
vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not
detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the
vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by
vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling
position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

5-58 Starting and driving

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you
by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will
have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the ICC
system may be temporarily unavailable. In these
instances, the ICC system may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is
automatically canceled. A chime will sound and
the system will not be able to be set:
● When the VDC system is turned off
● When the VDC or ABS operates
● When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed of
15 mph (24 km/h)
● When the system judges the vehicle is at a
standstill
● When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or
L (Low) (if so equipped) mode
● When the parking brake is applied
● When a wheel slips

LSD2574

Starting and driving 5-59

Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer
present, turn the system off using the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system back on to
use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC
system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a transparent or
translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may
not detect vehicles ahead. In these instances, the
ICC system may not cancel and may not be able
to maintain the selected following distance from
the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the
sensor area.
The system warning light (orange) will illuminate
and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges,
deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
the system may illuminate the system warning
light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” message.

5-60 Starting and driving

LSD2592

LSD2395

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.
Check to see if the radar sensor window is
blocked. If the radar sensor window is blocked,
remove the blocking material. Restart the engine.
If the warning light continues to illuminate, have
the ICC system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a
safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,
resume driving and set the ICC system again.

Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a
chime sounds and the system warning light (orange) will come on.

If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

● Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the
sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.
● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause
failure or malfunction.
● Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the
front bumper, it is recommended that you
contact a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement
LSD2698

FCC Notice

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

For USA

A is located on
The sensor for the ICC system 䊊
the front of the vehicle.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

● Always keep the sensor area clean.
● Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor. Do not touch or remove the
screw located on the sensor. Doing so could
cause failure or malfunction . If the sensor is
damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated
with minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.

Starting and driving 5-61

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING
(FEB) (if so equipped)
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB system
could result in serious injury or death.
● The FEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement for
the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It
cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness
or
dangerous
driving
techniques.
● The FEB system does not function in all
driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The FEB system can assist the driver when there
is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle
ahead in the traveling lane.

5-62 Starting and driving

LSD2698
A located
The FEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊
behind the lower grille of the front bumper to
measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the
same lane.

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB system warning light

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The FEB system will function when your vehicle is
driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the FEB
system will provide an initial warning to the driver
by both a visual and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the FEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward
collision, the system will automatically increase
the braking force. If the driver does not take
action, the FEB system issues the second visual
warning (red) and audible warning and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the
FEB system applies harder braking automatically.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the forward emergency braking system.

LSD2570

Starting and driving 5-63

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway
conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a
forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel,
accelerating or braking, the FEB system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
● When the steering wheel is turned as far as
necessary to avoid a collision.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
● When there is no longer a vehicle detected
ahead.
If the FEB system has stopped the vehicle, the
vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD2573

5-64 Starting and driving

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF

● The FEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

Perform the following steps to turn the FEB systems ON or OFF.

● The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:

button until “Settings” dis1. Press the
plays in the vehicle information display. Use
button to select “Driver Assisthe
tance.” Then press the ENTER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER
button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
ENTER button.
When the FEB system is turned off, the FEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
● The FEB system will be automatically turned
on when the engine is restarted.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for
the FEB system. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.

● In some road or traffic conditions, the
FEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in
the roadway.

● Braking distances increase on slippery
surfaces.

– Oncoming vehicles.

● The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within
certain limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstructions of
the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may
not be able to warn the driver properly.
Be sure that you check, clean and clear
the sensor area regularly.

– Crossing vehicles.
● The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the FEB
system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
● The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.

● Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.

– Interference by other radar sources.
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.

Starting and driving 5-65

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source, making it impossible
to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is
automatically turned off.
The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
FEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper is
covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is automatically turned off.
The FEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.

LSD2571

5-66 Starting and driving

● Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges,
deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
the system may illuminate the system warning
light (orange) and display the “Unavailable: Front
Radar Obstruction” message.

● Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the
front bumper, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the
P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean
the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft
cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the FEB system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the FEB system malfunctions, it will be turned
off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB
warning light (orange) will illuminate and the
warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the
vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the
vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and
restart the engine. If the warning light continues
to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
LSD2698

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

A is located on the front of the
The sensor 䊊
vehicle.

2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to
observe the following:
● Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
● Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensor.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

● Do not cover or attach stickers or similar
objects on the front bumper near the sensor
area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-67

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened
engine
life
and
reduced
engine
performance.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 RPM.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Avoid quick starts.
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi
(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
● Avoid rapid starts and stops
● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible
● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible
2. Maintain Constant Speed
● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops
● Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops
● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
● Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle
due to reduced engine load

5-68 Starting and driving

● Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to
increased aerodynamic drag
● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally
allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due
to reduced aerodynamic drag
● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary
braking
● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes
● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions
5. Use Cruise Control
● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed
● Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on flat
terrains

6. Plan for the Shortest Route
● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time
7. Avoid Idling
● Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
● Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
● Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible
● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system
11. ECO Mode
● The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the engine and
CVT (if so equipped) operation automatically to avoid rapid acceleration.

9. Winter Warm Up
● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy
● Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving
● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling

Starting and driving 5-69

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

SSD0488

WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed in P (Park) for CVT
models or in an appropriate gear for
manual transmission models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in
an accident. Make sure the shift lever
has been pushed as far forward as it can
go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

5-70 Starting and driving

POWER STEERING
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. MT models
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place
the shift lever in 1st gear.
CVT models
Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1 :
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.

2 :
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3 :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.

WARNING
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
● When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

Starting and driving 5-71

BRAKE SYSTEM
wheel operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.
If the electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate
the power steering system is not functioning
properly and may need servicing. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering, but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power steering warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.

5-72 Starting and driving

This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
● The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting from
careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces.
Remember that stopping distances on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on
normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or
if you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section
of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do
not lock during hard braking or when braking on
slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake
fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking
and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.

Starting and driving 5-73

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action
is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor
driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain
driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.

BRAKE ASSIST

● Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).

When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated
generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. it is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steering input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.
indiWhen the VDC system operates, the
cator in the instrument panel flashes to note the
following:

5-74 Starting and driving

● The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator
light” and ”VDC off indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
indicator light comes on in the instrument panel.
The VDC system automatically turns off when the
indicator light is off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
indicator illuminates to indisystem. The
cate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
indicator will not
functions are off and the
flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may
formance, and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
indicaoperate properly and the
tor light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
indicator light
deteriorated, the
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
The system gradually adjusts braking power during normal braking to help provide an enhanced
brake feel.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the
system optimizes the distribution of force to each
of the front and rear wheels depending on the
radius of the turn.

Starting and driving 5-75

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may
formance, and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
indicaoperate properly and the
tor light may illuminate.

5-76 Starting and driving

● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
indicator light
deteriorated, the
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole, or use the remote keyless entry key fob or
the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For
additional information, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and
availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.

● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

Starting and driving 5-77

WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.

5-78 Starting and driving

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off
(Push-button ignition models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(Push-button ignition models only)
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving, perform the following procedure:

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

● Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds, or
● Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the
“CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles without a vehicle
information display) also appears in the trip computer or the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” (vehicles with a vehicle information display) appears
in the vehicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sections of this manual.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.

● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted
or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will remain
on after one minute. Have your tires
replaced and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these
services.

● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is
shifted into P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back
of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked
up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE2250

Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting
A . Remove the jack
and spare tire cover 䊊
and the spare tire as indicated.
2. To remove the jack, take off the strap and lift
out. If necessary, remove the spare tire first
to easily access the jack strap.

LCE2207

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
1
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊
as illustrated.
2 between the wheel and jack rod to
Apply cloth 䊊
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.

CE1089

Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.

In case of emergency 6-5

● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.

SCE0002

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.

notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.

Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two

6-6 In case of emergency

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the
tire.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
D,
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
E ). Lower the vehicle completely.
䊊

WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ,䊊
E ) until they are
illustrated (䊊
tight.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the
vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
This is because the tire pressurizes as the
tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.

In case of emergency 6-7

JUMP STARTING

WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. Refer to specific instructions
under the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
LCE2254

6. Install the jack in its storage area and tighten
the jack strap.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency

● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
LCE2223

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner (if so equipped), etc.).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
4. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
illustrated (䊊

In case of emergency 6-9

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to
4 seconds before trying again.
8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.

6-10 In case of emergency

CAUTION
● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
● Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models and Manual Transmission
(M/T) cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may cause
transmission damage
● For Manual Transmission (M/T) models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir with
the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir if necessary. Have
your vehicle repaired. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time.

● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-11

For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

A CVT
䊊
B M/T
䊊

LCE2209

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION
● Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or 4 wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
● When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on towing dollies, or when
towing Manual Transmission (M/T)
models with the front wheels on the
ground:

A CVT
䊊
B M/T
䊊

LCE2122

– Place the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models with
steering lock mechanism).
– Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position.

● When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) or Manual Transmission (M/T) models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
● Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for Manual Transmissions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 80 km/h (50 mph)
– Distance: Less than 80 km (50 miles)

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to main structural members of the
vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-13

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:

● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
System (if so equipped).

● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.

6-14 In case of emergency

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● After a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● After driving on coastal roads.
● When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
● When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
to assist you in choosing the proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on the
center console and door pull finishers. If cleaning
is required use mild soap and water. However if
mild soap and water won’t clean the center console and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyl
and Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or Occupant Classification
Sensor (OCS). This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and result
in serious personal injury.

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION
● Never use benzene, thinner, or any similar material on the interior surfaces or
surface damage may occur. Such damage is not covered under the NISSAN
warranty.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning
hook. For additional information, refer
to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖ in this
section.
● Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
● Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
● After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure they
are properly installed.
LAI2009

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision, injury or death:
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or
equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle
model and model year.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that
the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with
the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)
and ensure that the floor mat is properly
positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with pedal operation. With the ignition in the
OFF position, the selector lever in the P
(Park) position (Automatic Transmission
models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position (Manual Transmission models) fully
apply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation or
prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for details about installing the floor mats in your
vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor
mat positioning hooks for each seating position
varies depending on the vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided with
the mat and the following:

Appearance and care 7-5

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic collisions.

LPD2495

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the floor mat
positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. For additional information,
refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.

7-6 Appearance and care

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Temperature

CAUTION

Air pollution

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Turn signal bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service because
the fuel lines are under high pressure
even when the engine is off.

CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
● Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions
regarding only those items which are relatively
easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s
Manual/Service Manual order information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it
is recommended that you have it done by a
NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
MRA8DE engine

1.
2.

Engine oil filler cap
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir
3. Air cleaner
4. Battery
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2931

Do-it-yourself 8-3

MR16DDT engine

1.
2.

LDI3011

8-4 Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information
on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” found in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
● Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
● When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you
operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to
the NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
LDI2167

MRA8DE

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
B , add coolant to the MAX level
the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
䊊
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
A.
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI3060

MR16DDT
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
For additional information, refer to the NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
For additional information on the location of the
engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section.

● Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine
is hot. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the
radiator.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

ENGINE OIL

LDI2168

MRA8DE

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI3039

MR16DDT

LDI0371

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A , remove the oil filler cap
the L (Low) mark 䊊
and pour recommended oil through the
C.
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
● Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
● It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing intervals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under
the following conditions may require more frequent oil change:
● repeated short distance driving
● driving in dusty conditions
● stop and go commuting.

LDI3041

MRA8DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

LDI3043

MR16DDT
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B.
䊊

B with a wrench by
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in
this section.

WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
● Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
34 N·m (25 ft-lb)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
For additional information on the drain and
refill capacity, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
For additional information on the location of the
engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine compartment
check locations” in this section.

LDI3045

MRA8DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter. Securely tighten oil
filter with wrench. Do not use excessive
force.
Oil filter tightening torque:
18 N·m (13 ft-lb)
LDI3044

MR16DDT
B.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

B with an oil filter
4. Loosen the oil filter 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

8. Refill engine with recommended oil through
A , then install oil filler
the oil filler opening 䊊
cap securely.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
oil if necessary.

For additional information on the location of the
engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine compartment
check locations” in this section.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
● NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
● Do not use Automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission fluid
in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the
CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not
covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
● Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for servicing.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For additional brake and clutch fluid specification
information,
refer
to
“Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.

WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
(if so equipped) systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.

LDI2169

BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the level is
1 , or the brake warning light
below the MIN line 䊊
comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or
2 . If
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
fluid must be added frequently, the system should
be checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze
or equivalent.

CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.

LDI2169

CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the level is
1 , or the brake warning light
below the MIN line 䊊
comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or
2 . If
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
fluid must be added frequently, the system should
be checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2170

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

BATTERY
● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.

● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WDI0224

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.

LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
A is located near the battery
The current sensor 䊊
along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.

LDI2178

CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

WDI0638

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Automatic tensioner pulley
Generator pulley
Water pump pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley (if so
equipped/Idler pulley (if so equipped)
Crankshaft pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor
condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Platinum-tipped spark plugs (except
California models)
A
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (MR16DDT
engine or California models only)
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER
NOTE:

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

WARNING

LDI2171

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:

● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.

A.
1. Unlatch the retaining clips 䊊

B and remove.
2. Pull up at points 䊊

C.
3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing 䊊

4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the inside
of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover
with a damp cloth, then replace air cleaner
filter.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield–washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse
the blades with clear water. If your windshield is
still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.

LDI2721

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow
the procedure below:
1. When ignition switch is ON or within
60 seconds after placing the ignition switch
from the ON to OFF position, place the
windshield wiper and washer lever into the
OFF position.
2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer
A upwards twice within 0.5 seconds.
lever 䊊
This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

LDI2475

CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2722

3. Once the wipers are in the service position,
B.
push the release tab 䊊

C and remove.
4. Move the wiper blade down 䊊

5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.

LDI2723

7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and washer
D once and relever to the mist position 䊊
lease. This action will cause the wipers to
resume the set position.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
F . This may
to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊
cause clogging or improper windshield-washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
E .
with a needle or small pin 䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-19

BRAKES

FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front (and rear-if so equipped) disc-type
brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is
applied. The rear drum-type brakes (if so
equipped) self-adjust every time the parking
brake is applied.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate
maintenance schedule information in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

LDI0455
A is used in
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B is used in the passenger compartment fuse
䊊
box.
A fuses can be installed in the engine
Type 䊊
compartment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
A and lifting the cover up.
tab 䊊
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, which
is located in the center of the fuse block in
the passenger compartment.

LDI0457
A fuse is used to replace a type 䊊
B fuse,
If a type 䊊
A fuse will not be level with the fuse
the type 䊊
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
B fuses cannot be installed in the under
Type 䊊
A fuses in the
hood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊
under hood fuse boxes.

LDI2172

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or
cause a fire.

NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
fuses listed on the fuse label.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2746
B , replace it with a new
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
C.
fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
fuses listed on the fuse label.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI2712

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or
cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.

NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
A with a suit2. Remove the fuse box cover 䊊
able tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the
trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
B.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊

LDI2713
C , replace it with an
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
D.
equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all
fuses listed on the fuse label.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.

LDI2747

Extended storage switch

How to replace the extended storage switch:

If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.

NOTE:

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.

The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

3. Remove the fuse box cover.
A and 䊊
B found on
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
C.
fuse box 䊊

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
B and twist it to separate the upper
corner 䊊
part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Make sure that the + side faces the botC.
tom of the case 䊊
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equivalent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw securely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
LDI2219

KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
A.
1. Remove the screw 䊊

● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.

● The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

● The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

For Canada:
This devise complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
A into
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊
B of the corner and twist it to sepathe slit 䊊
rate the upper part from the lower part. Place
a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the
casing.

LDI2001

8-26 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
C
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊
D.
and 䊊

Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
FCC Notice:

LDI2637

For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS

CAUTION
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in
this section.

● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
LDI2980

Type A (if so equipped)

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
NOTE:
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which used a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without removing
the headlight assembly.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.

Reverse instructions to install bulbs and replace
fender protector.

WARNING
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or
right after being turned off. Burning may
result.

CAUTION
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb
with bare hands or allow oil or grease to
get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
LDI2981

Type B (if so equipped)
A counter1. Rotate the (high beam) cover 䊊
clockwise to access the (high beam) bulb
C . Rotate the bulb socket 䊊
C counsocket 䊊
terclockwise and remove bulb.
B (if so
2. Rotate the (low beam) cover 䊊
equipped) counterclockwise to access the
D (if so equipped).
(low beam) bulb socket 䊊
D (if so equipped)
Rotate the bulb socket 䊊
counterclockwise and remove bulb.

• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp
reflector for a long time because dust,
moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

TURN SIGNAL BULB
To replace the turn signal bulb follow the instructions listed in the “Replacing the halogen headlight bulb” found in this section.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in
this section.

• Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the
lens, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for servicing.

E coun3. Rotate the side marker bulb socket 䊊
terclockwise and remove bulb.
F coun4. Rotate the turn signal bulb socket 䊊
G.
terclockwise and remove bulb 䊊

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the chart.
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light
for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light
body and affect the performance of the
fog light.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Access to the fog light is in front of and
behind the front tire and the fascia.
LDI2179

A ; carefully pull back
3. Remove the fasteners 䊊
the front fender protector.
B counterclockwise and
4. Rotate the bulb 䊊
pull out to remove.
5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog light. Do
not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of
removal.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)
Low/Daytime running (Canada only)
High
Turn/Park
Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)
Low/Daytime running
High
Turn/Park
Park
Side marker
Daytime running lights (NISMO models only)
Front fog light (if so equipped)
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)*
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)*
Map lights*
Room light
Trunk light*
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped)
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Rear combination light*
Turn
Tail
Stop/Tail
Backup (reversing)
Side marker
License plate light*

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

55
65
27/8
5

H11
H9
3157 AK
W5W

—
65
27/8
—
5
—
55
—
—
—
8
3.4

—
H9
3157 AK
—
W5W
—
H11
—
—
—
—
158

—
—

21
—
21/5
16
—
5

WY21W
—
W21/5W
W16W
—
W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Map light
Room light
Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
Headlight assembly
Fog light (if so equipped)/ Daytime running light (NISMO models only)
High-mount stop light
Trunk light
License plate light
Rear combination light

WDI0263

Replacement procedures

LDI2936

8-32 Do-it-yourself

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.

“Starting and driving” section, and “Flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE
PRES warning is displayed in the odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:

The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

For additional information, refer to “Low
tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so
equipped) provides visual and audible
signals outside the vehicle for inflating
tires to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information, refer
to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond
the specified capacity may also
result in failure of other vehicle
components.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Spare tire size.

LDI2007

Tire and loading information label
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.

4
䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem
and compare to the specification shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air
is added, press the core of the valve stem
briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the pressure and
add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.
LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the
valve stem. Do not press too hard or force
the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If
the hissing sound of air escaping from the
tire is heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Grades: NISMO
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
230 kPa, 33 PSI
215/45R18
Rear Original Tire:
230 kPa, 33 PSI
215/45R18
Spare Tire:
420 kPa, 60 PSI
T125/70D16
Size

Grades: S, SV, SR, SL
Size
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
205/50R17
230 kPa, 33 PSI
P205/55R16
Rear Original Tire:
205/50R17
230 kPa, 33 PSI
P205/55R16
Spare Tire:
420 kPa, 60 PSI
T125/70D16
Grades: FE + S
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
250 kPa, 36 PSI
P205/55R16
Rear Original Tire:
250 kPa, 36 PSI
P205/55R16
Spare Tire:
420 kPa, 60 PSI
T125/70D16
Size

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.

WDI0395

Example

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
䊊

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Do-it-yourself 8-37

ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester
and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure
䊊

This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊
LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
䊊

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code:
identification mark.

Manufacturer’s

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
8-38 Do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.

● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on 205/50R17 size tires. Installation of the
tire chains/cables on 205/50R17 size tires
will cause damage to the vehicle. If you
plan to use tire chains/cables, you should
install 205/55R16 size tires on your
vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

8-40 Do-it-yourself

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.

● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.

WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.

● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system, ground clearance, bodyto-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, headlight aim
and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with four tires that were the same size
and you are only replacing two of the
four tires, install the new tires on the
rear axle. Placing new tires on the front
axle may cause loss of vehicle control in
some driving conditions and cause an
accident and personal injury

8-42 Do-it-yourself

● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the
VDC system and/or interference with
the brake discs. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted
or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will
not be indicated, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

● The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it
is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
● When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
● Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
● Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may
be clogged up with dirt and cause a
malfunction or loss of pressure.
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail without warning.
● The use of retread
recommended.

tires

not

● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.

Since the spare tire is not equipped with the
TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS
will not function.

● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:

Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.

WARNING
● The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

8-44 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Emission Control System Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and Body Maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional Maintenance Items for severe
operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Emission control system maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Maintenance under severe operating conditions. . . . . . 9-13
Severe driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Maintenance log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical
condition, as well as its emissions and engine
performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are
required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional
or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips and training programs. They are completely
qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before
work begins.

General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these
procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department can perform the service
needed to meet the maintenance requirements
on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if
you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down
further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your
vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to
“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not
catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism (if so
equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that the
vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure
they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold
securely in all latched positions.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.

1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.

In these cases, the battery may need to be
charged to maintain battery health.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for serviceable batteries): Check
the fluid level in each cell. It should be between
the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid
levels are between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For
additional information, refer to the “Appearance
and care” section of this manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give
you a better understanding of the scheduled
maintenance items that should be regularly
checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule
indicates at which mileage/time intervals each
item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle
requires that some items be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. For additional information,
refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended by
NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are
not required to perform maintenance on these
items in order to maintain the warranties which
come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be
found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of nonOEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product.
Many of the aftermarket flushing systems
use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear,
fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals.
When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant,
be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the
proper mixture. (For additional information on the
proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine
cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve
noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:
Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks,
deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter)

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust
pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or
replace parts as necessary.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and
connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for
damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease.
Under severe driving conditions, inspect more
frequently.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “General maintenance” in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and
uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals. If using a
car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy
roads:
● Replace the manual transaxle gear oil every
20,000 miles or 24 months.
● Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect
the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than
210000, replace the CVT fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical
driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance
schedules that may be used, depending upon the
conditions in which you usually drive. These
schedules contain both distance and time intervals,
up
to
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the
odometer reading will indicate when service is
needed. However, if you drive very little, your
vehicle should be serviced at the regular time
intervals shown in the schedule.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
● Operating in hot weather in stop-an-go
“rush hour” traffic.
● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distances, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and
atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,
individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
● Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on
vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance
items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped type)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)
or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the
factory fill coolant.
(6) For MRA8DE:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
For MR16DDT:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.045 in (1.15 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such
maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝
Brake fluid 夝
CVT fluid
Manual transmission gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
夝
Tire rotation
Front drive shaft boots 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I

15
(24)
18

I
I

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I
R
R

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines and cables
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝
Brake fluid 夝
CVT fluid
Manual transmission gear oil
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
夝
Tire rotation
Front drive shaft boots 夝
Exhaust system 夝
In-cabin microfilter
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I

75
(120)
90

I
I

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136) (144) (152) (160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I

I
I
R
R

I
R
R

I
I

I
R
R

I
I
R
R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealer every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every
60,000 miles (96,000 km).
(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or
24 months.
(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving
conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for
long distance, such as police, taxi or doorto-door delivery use.

● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads, rotors, drum and lining
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Front drive shaft boots
Exhaust system

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

● Driving in dusty conditions.
● Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
● Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Air conditioner system (if so equipped)
refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
When traveling or registering in another country. . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Air conditioner specification label
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . .10-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-22

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1 For additional
information, refer to
“Engine oil” in the “Doit-yourself” section of
this manual.

Cooling system with
reservoir

With oil filter
change
MRA8DE
Without oil
filter change
With oil filter
change
MR16DDT
Without oil
filter change
MRA8DE
With manual
transmission
MR16DDT
With continuously variable
transmission

Manual transmission fluid

10-2 Technical and consumer information

50 L

13-1/4 gal

11 gal

4.0 L

4-1/4 qt

3-1/2 qt

3.8 L

4 qt

3-3/8 qt

4.5 L

4-3/4 qt

4 qt

4.3 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

6.6 L

1-3/4 gal

1-1/2 gal

8.5 L

2-1/4 gal

1-7/8 gal

8.7 L

2-1/4 gal

1-7/8 gal

—

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommendation” in this
section.

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that
matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, refer
to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent.

• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type
75W-80, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type is not
available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

—

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Multi-purpose grease

—
—

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Air conditioning system oil

—

4.8 L

1-1/4 gal

1-1/8 gal

Windshield-washer fluid

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using
fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
• NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if so
equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if so
equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
MRA8DE
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
MR16DDT
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular
gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91), but you
may notice a decrease in performance

CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline specifications

● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.

● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether
(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. NISSAN does not recommend
the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content
and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your
service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
● If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN
does not recommend the use of fuel containing
MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to consult
your gasoline retailer for more details.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, it is recommended that you have a
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the
vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

LTI2051

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in
order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if so
equipped) REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S (DH-PS) or the exact
equivalents.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil may
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
when servicing your air conditioner system.

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

in (mm)
cu in (cm3)

MRA8DE

MR16DDT

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline
3.138 x 3.547 (79.7 x 90.1)
109.71 (1,798)
1–3–4–2

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline
3.138 x 3.193 (79.7 x 81.1)
98.73 (1,618)
1–3–4–2

No adjustment is necessary.

PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California models)
DILKAR6A-11 (California models)

DILKAR7E9HS

Idle speed
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)

in (mm)

Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

0.043 (1.1)

0.035 (0.9)

Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel type

Size

Aluminum

16 x 6.5J
17 x 6.5J
18 x 7J

1.77 (45)
1.77 (45)
1.77 (45)

16 x 6.5JJ

1.77 (45)

Steel

Offset in (mm)

Tire size

P205/55R16
205/50R17
215/45R18
215/45ZR18

Spare tire

T125/70D16

10-10 Technical and consumer information

Overall length

Overall width
Overall height

Country

Model

Unit: in (mm)

USA and
Canada
USA and
Canada

NISMO

183.7 (4,666)

except NISMO

182.5 (4,636)

NISMO
SR Turbo
except SR Turbo
and NISMO

Front Track
Rear Track
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle
weight rating
Gross axle weight
rating
Front
Rear

69.3 (1,761)
58.8 (1,494)
59 (1,498)
58.9 (1,495)
60.2 (1,530)
60.2 (1,530)
106.3 (2,700)

lb (kg)

Refer to “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. certification label” on the
center pillar between the drivlb (kg) er’s side front and rear doors.
lb (kg)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and
registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility
of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for
any inconvenience that may result.

TI1050M

STI0465

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

LDI2189

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0349

WTI0189

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),
etc. Review it carefully.

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI0197

LTI2048

LTI2231

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL (if so equipped)

Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.

1. Hold the front license plate bracket against
the front bumper fascia and mark two locaA.
tions 䊊
2. Drill two shallow 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in the
front bumper fascia at the two locations
marked in the previous step.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
LTI2232
B into the holes in the
3. Insert two grommets 䊊
front bumper fascia.

4. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into
the grommet holes to turn the threaded part
of the grommet 90°.
5. Mount the front license plate bracket using
C.
two screws 䊊

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:

10-14 Technical and consumer information

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard parts, fluids, emergency
tools and spare tire assembly. This
weight does not include passengers
and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.

WTI0169

Example

10-16 Technical and consumer information

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
“Tire and Loading Information label” in this
section.

LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal injury.

Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the
ratings.

● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Technical and consumer information 10-17

TOWING A TRAILER
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
● Always tow with the manual transmission in
N (Neutral).

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in N
(Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the
engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of
towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.

CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.

Continuously Variable Transmission (if
so equipped)

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

● Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle
with the front tires on the ground. Doing
so may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
● DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

Technical and consumer information 10-19

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers)

For Canada

Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or

10-20 Technical and consumer information

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink
after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to
prepare the vehicle for testing.

● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.
This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please visit the nearest NISSAN
dealer. For the phone number and location of a
NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN
Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a
bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48
Side and curtain (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-20
Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-58, 2-20
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-32
Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . .4-23
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20, 4-27
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-36

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-73
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
APPS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-70, 4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . .4-70
Compact disc (CD) player . .4-46, 4-51, 4-58
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-53
FM radio reception. . . . . . . . . .4-35, 4-44
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
iPod® player operation . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-72
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-62
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-62
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-56
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-30
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-60

B
Back button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76, 8-13
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24, 8-25
NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .8-26
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70, 4-70
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . . . .4-94
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-94
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-73
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-31
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-72
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-23, 8-20
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Self-adjusting brakes . . .
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . .
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system. . . . . . . . . .
Break-in schedule . . . . . . .
Brightness/contrast button . .
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . .
Bulb check/instrument panel .
Bulb replacement . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.8-20
.8-11
.5-74
.8-11
.8-20
.5-72
.5-68
. .4-9

. . . . . . . . .2-44
. . . . . . . . .2-16
. . . . . . . . .8-31

C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-14
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
CD player (See audio system) . .4-46, 4-51, 4-58
Check tire press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-19, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-33, 1-38
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-50
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50

11-2

Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-44
Clock setting
(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . .4-7
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-50
Clutch
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-46, 4-51, 4-58
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-44
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-72
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-32
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-7
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53, 2-54
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system). . . . . . . . . . .1-55
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . .2-43, 2-44
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-44
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Driving
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-9, 5-21
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
E
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . .
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency engine shutoff. . . . .
Emission control information label
Emission control system warranty.

.
.
.
.
.

. .5-24
. .5-70
. .5-12
.10-12
.10-19

Engine
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-14
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-7
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-17
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-15
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . .2-7
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-3
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Forward Emergency Braking (FEB). . . . . . .2-17
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-48
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-26
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-34
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-62, 2-64, 2-64, 2-65
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-7
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . . . .4-94
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-41
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . .2-46, 4-75
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-32
Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . .4-23
Heater operation . . . .4-17, 4-19, 4-25, 4-33
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . .4-31

11-3

HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . .2-62, 2-64, 2-64, 2-65
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-66
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
J

I
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-14
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . .5-10
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
Important vehicle information label . . . . . .10-12
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-30
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-44
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-8, 3-16
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-23
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-23
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59, 2-60

11-4

K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . .8-24, 8-25
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . .3-8, 3-16
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . .3-7
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . .3-2, 3-10
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-4
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . .
Emission control information label
Engine serial number. . . . . . . .
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . .
Tire and Loading Information label
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.10-13
.10-12
.10-12
.10-12
.10-12
.10-13
.10-11

. . . .10-11

Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-57
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .10-13
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-20
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-31
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-16
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-41
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59, 2-60
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19, 2-34
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-60
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-26
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-25
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-34
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-17, 2-19, 2-34
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19, 2-34
Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-14
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49, 2-49
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-44
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-30
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Mobile apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57, 2-57
N
NissanConnectSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
NissanConnectSM Services . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-10
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .10-6
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-7
Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-97, 4-109
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22

P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system. . . . .4-94
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-33, 1-38
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-44
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-78
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

11-5

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-53
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-72
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . .5-36
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-11
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .10-20
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-33, 1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Seat belt
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

11-6

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-11
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-17
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-20
Seats
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
Security systems
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-36, 2-36
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-44
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-17
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75

Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-74
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8, 8-14
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-15
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-15
Steering
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-72
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-57
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-58, 2-20
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-48
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-57
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-41
Supplemental side and curtain side-impact
air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-56
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-41
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-44
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-7
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilt
Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-3
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-43
Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-13
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-18
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-18
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 5-3
Towing
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . .2-62, 2-64, 2-64, 2-65
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-16
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-9, 5-21
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5
Troubleshooting guide
(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . .4-120
Trunk lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . .10-18
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-62
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-63
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-15
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-47
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-74
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-74
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-11
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-36, 2-36
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . .2-38, 5-10, 5-13
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . .4-82, 4-97, 4-109
Voice Recognition System. . . . . . . . . . .4-116

11-7

W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-20
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-17
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-17
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-34
Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-17, 2-19, 2-34
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19, 2-34
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-50
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-20
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-20
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-36, 2-36
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Audible reminders . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Warning lights . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 3-20
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . .10-10
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

11-8

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking passengers’ windows
Power rear windows . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . .
Rear power windows . . . . .
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . .
Windshield wiper blades . . . . .
Wiper
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer switch . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.2-55
.2-55
.2-56
.2-55
.2-56
.8-12
.8-18

. . . . . . .8-18
. . . . . . .2-39

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
MRA8DE
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
MR16DDT
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least
87 AKI number (Research octane number 91),
but you may notice a decrease in performance

● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85
fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed
for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by
such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Do not use fuel that contains the octane
booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel
containing MMT may adversely affect
vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you
may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use
of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and
oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle damage
or shortened engine life.

Printing : March 2017
OM17EM
0B17U2
Publication No.: OM2E
0B16U3
Printed in U.S.A.

B17-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c006 80.159825, 2016/09/16-03:31:08
Modify Date                     : 2018:01:30 10:07:55-06:00
Create Date                     : 2016:10:27 08:30:52-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:01:30 10:07:55-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:6fb10b84-b551-4be0-b5c9-ab3ed93a6832
Instance ID                     : uuid:425ecdad-3ebd-4891-a010-3167eda598d4
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2017 Nissan Sentra | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2017 Nissan Sentra Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, sentra, 2017, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance
Producer                        : Creo Normalizer JTP
Trapped                         : False
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 500
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Keywords                        : nissan; sentra; 2017; owner manual; owner guide; owner’s manual; pdf; vehicle manual; service, maintenance
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2017 Nissan Sentra | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation